You are on page 1of 209

© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Sydney 2023
Crossings
Guide to Road Design Part 5B:
Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway
Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Publisher
Edition 1.2 prepared by: Road Design Drainage Technical Sub-committee
Austroads Ltd.
Level 9, 570 George Street
Edition 1.2 project manager: Donald Hicks Sydney NSW 2000 Australia
Phone: +61 2 8265 3300
Abstract
austroads@austroads.com.au
Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and www.austroads.com.au
Floodway Crossings contains guidance on the design of open channels,
culverts and floodway crossings to support the operation and management of About Austroads
the road network. This Guide needs to be used in conjunction with the other
two Parts of the Guide to Road Design that relate to drainage design: Austroads is the peak organisation of Australasian
road transport and traffic agencies.
• Part 5: Drainage – General and Hydrology Considerations
Austroads’ purpose is to support our member
• Part 5A: Drainage – Road Surface, Network, Basins and Subsurface. organisations to deliver an improved Australasian
This Guide provides guidance on the fundamentals of open channel, culvert road transport network. To succeed in this task, we
and floodway crossing flows, and includes methods to undertake the design of undertake leading-edge road and transport
these drainage facilities. research which underpins our input to policy
development and published guidance on the
design, construction and management of the road
network and its associated infrastructure.
Keywords Austroads provides a collective approach that
Open channels, hydraulic jump, table drains, batter drains, catch drains, delivers value for money, encourages shared
culverts, hydraulic design, headwater, tailwater, inlet control, outlet control, knowledge and drives consistency for road users.
blockage, floodway crossings, submergence, time of closure Austroads is governed by a Board consisting of
senior executive representatives from each of its
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Edition 1.2 published January 2023 eleven member organisations:

In Edition 1.2, Sections 4.1, 4.2, 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 have been rewritten. Also, • Transport for NSW
the term ‘floodways’ has been changed to ‘floodway crossings’ throughout the
• Department of Transport and Planning Victoria
document and the term RL (Reduced Level) has been replaced by Height.
• Queensland Department of Transport and Main
Edition 1.1 published August 2018 Roads
Edition 1.0 published May 2013 • Main Roads Western Australia
• Department for Infrastructure and Transport
South Australia
• Department of State Growth Tasmania
• Department of Infrastructure, Planning and
Logistics Northern Territory
ISBN 978-1-922700-78-0
• Transport Canberra and City Services
Austroads Project No. SRD6219 Pages 198 Directorate, Australian Capital Territory
Austroads Publication No. AGRD05B-23 • Department of Infrastructure, Transport,
Regional Development, Communications and the
Arts
© Austroads Ltd 2023 • Australian Local Government Association
This work is copyright. Apart from any use as permitted under the • Waka Kotahi NZ Transport Agency.
Copyright Act 1968, no part may be reproduced by any process without
the prior written permission of Austroads.

This Guide is produced by Austroads as a general guide only. Austroads has taken care to ensure that this publication is correct at
the time of publication. Austroads does not make any representations or warrant that the Guide is free from error, is current, or,
where used, will ensure compliance with any legislative, regulatory or general law requirements. Austroads expressly disclaims all
and any guarantees, undertakings and warranties, expressed or implied, and is not liable, including for negligence, for any loss
(incidental or consequential), injury, damage or any other consequences arising directly or indirectly from the use of this Guide.
Where third party information is contained in this Guide, it is included with the consent of the third party and in good faith. It does not
necessarily reflect the considered views of Austroads Readers should rely on their own skill, care and judgement to apply the
information contained in this Guide and seek professional advice regarding their particular issues.

Catchments and creeks have ownership of figure 3.15 and figure 3.16 and have been reproduced with permission. These images
cannot be reproduced within another publication without the written permission from the director of catchments and creeks pty ltd.
Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Summary

The Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings, provides
road designers and other practitioners with guidance on the design of open channels, culverts and floodway
crossings. This guide does not provide all the information necessary to complete a design and needs to be
used in conjunction with the other two parts of the Guide to Road Design Part 5: Drainage, that relate to
drainage design, namely:
• Part 5: Drainage – General and Hydrology Considerations
• Part 5A: Drainage – Road Surface, Networks, Basins and Subsurface.

The guide includes design processes and formula necessary to design effective drainage systems and
infrastructure. It is supported by appendices containing design charts and worked examples that provide
further information.

This guide provides guidelines on good practice in relation to drainage design that will apply in most
situations, rather than specifying mandatory practice. The reason for not specifying mandatory practice is
that there are many factors that influence the design of a road and drainage for a particular situation or site,
and practitioners therefore need to exercise sound judgement in applying the information contained in this
guide.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page i


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Contents

Summary i

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 1
Purpose .................................................................................................................................................... 1
Scope of this Part ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Road Safety .............................................................................................................................................. 3

Open Drains and Channels ................................................................................................................... 4


Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Definition and Use .................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.2 Factors in Choice of Channel Type.......................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Environmental Consultation ..................................................................................................... 5
2.1.4 Types of Open Drains .............................................................................................................. 6
General Considerations ..........................................................................................................................10
Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow ....................................................................................................10
2.3.1 Stream Dynamics ................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.2 Assumptions for Analysis ....................................................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Fundamental Equations ......................................................................................................... 12
2.3.4 Application of Fundamental Equations .................................................................................. 17
2.3.5 Energy Principles ................................................................................................................... 20
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

2.3.6 Hydraulic Jump ...................................................................................................................... 24


2.3.7 Hydraulic Drop ....................................................................................................................... 30
Erosive Velocities in Natural Streams ....................................................................................................30
Backwater ...............................................................................................................................................31
2.5.1 Tidal Waters ........................................................................................................................... 31
2.5.2 Downstream Tributary ............................................................................................................ 31
Tailwater Heights ....................................................................................................................................31
2.6.1 Tailwater Effects..................................................................................................................... 31
2.6.2 Design Tailwater Heights ....................................................................................................... 32
Open Channel Design ............................................................................................................................32
2.7.1 Design Methodology .............................................................................................................. 33
2.7.2 Channel Transitions ............................................................................................................... 38
2.7.3 Energy Losses in Channel Bends .......................................................................................... 39
2.7.4 Superelevation in Channel Bends.......................................................................................... 39
Grassed Channels ..................................................................................................................................40
2.8.1 Normal Grassed Channels ..................................................................................................... 40
2.8.2 Reinforced Grassed Channels ............................................................................................... 41
Channels Lined with Hard Facings .........................................................................................................42
2.9.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 42
2.9.2 Riprap and Rock Filled Wire Mattresses/Gabions ................................................................. 42
2.9.3 Concrete Lined Channels ...................................................................................................... 44
Channel Drops ........................................................................................................................................45
2.10.1 Check Dams ........................................................................................................................... 45
Baffle Chutes ..........................................................................................................................................45
Edge Drains and Median Drains ............................................................................................................46
2.12.1 Design of Edge and Median Drainage ................................................................................... 46
Table Drains and Table Drain Blocks .....................................................................................................49
2.13.1 Table Drains ........................................................................................................................... 49
2.13.2 Table Drain Blocks ................................................................................................................. 51
2.13.3 Diversion Drains and Diversion Blocks .................................................................................. 51
Batter Drains and Chutes .......................................................................................................................53
2.14.1 Design Procedures – Batter Drains ....................................................................................... 53
Catch Drains and Catch Banks ..............................................................................................................54

Austroads 2023 | page ii


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.15.1 Catch Drains .......................................................................................................................... 54


2.15.2 Catch Banks ........................................................................................................................... 55
2.15.3 Design Procedures – Catch Drains and Catch Banks ........................................................... 56
Worked Examples ..................................................................................................................................56
2.16.1 Example 1: Manning’s Equation – Determine the Flow Rate, Velocity and State of
Flow for a Stream ................................................................................................................... 56
2.16.2 Example 2: Manning’s Equation – Determine the Depth and Velocity of Flow Based on
a Known Discharge/Flow Rate in a Stream ........................................................................... 58
2.16.3 Example 3: Manning’s Equation: Determine the Flow Rate and Average Velocity in a
Compound Stream ................................................................................................................. 61
2.16.4 Example 4: Hard-lined/Rigid Boundary Channel Design ....................................................... 64
2.16.5 Example 5: Vegetated/Erodible Boundary Channel Design .................................................. 66

Culverts .................................................................................................................................................70
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................70
Information Required ..............................................................................................................................70
Culvert Location......................................................................................................................................71
3.3.1 Horizontal Alignment .............................................................................................................. 71
3.3.2 Vertical Profile ........................................................................................................................ 72
3.3.3 Non-hydraulic Considerations ................................................................................................ 72
Culvert Type ...........................................................................................................................................74
3.4.1 Culvert Shape ........................................................................................................................ 74
3.4.2 Materials ................................................................................................................................. 74
Culvert Size ............................................................................................................................................75
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

3.5.1 Minimum Culvert Size Allowable............................................................................................ 75


3.5.2 Other Sizing Considerations .................................................................................................. 75
Structural Requirements .........................................................................................................................76
3.6.1 Design Loads ......................................................................................................................... 76
3.6.2 Existing Culverts .................................................................................................................... 76
3.6.3 Space between Pipes in Multiple–Barrel Culverts ................................................................. 77
3.6.4 Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 77
Hydraulic Design Considerations ...........................................................................................................77
3.7.1 Design Discharge ................................................................................................................... 77
3.7.2 Outlet Velocity ........................................................................................................................ 78
3.7.3 Culverts in Flat Terrain ........................................................................................................... 78
3.7.4 Siltation and Blockage ........................................................................................................... 79
3.7.5 Allowable Headwater (AHW) ................................................................................................. 79
3.7.6 Tailwater (TW)........................................................................................................................ 80
Typical Culvert Operating Conditions .....................................................................................................80
3.8.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 80
3.8.2 Inlet Control Conditions .......................................................................................................... 80
3.8.3 Outlet Control Conditions ....................................................................................................... 82
Hydraulic Calculations ............................................................................................................................82
3.9.1 Control at Outlet ..................................................................................................................... 83
3.9.2 Determination of Tailwater ..................................................................................................... 85
Design Procedures .................................................................................................................................85
3.10.1 Hydraulic Design .................................................................................................................... 86
3.10.2 Collect Design Data ............................................................................................................... 86
3.10.3 Select a Trial Culvert .............................................................................................................. 89
3.10.4 Design Discharge for Trials .................................................................................................... 89
3.10.5 Determine Inlet Control Headwater Depth ............................................................................. 90
3.10.6 Determine Outlet Control Headwater Depth .......................................................................... 90
3.10.7 Determine the Controlling Headwater .................................................................................... 91
3.10.8 Outlet Velocity – Outlet Control.............................................................................................. 91
3.10.9 Outlet Velocity – Inlet Control ................................................................................................ 93
3.10.10 Outlet Flow Energy ................................................................................................................ 94
3.10.11 Design Check ......................................................................................................................... 95

Austroads 2023 | page iii


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.10.12 Practical Design ..................................................................................................................... 95


Blockage of Culverts...............................................................................................................................95
Consideration of Large or Extreme Events ............................................................................................96
Culvert Outlet Protection ........................................................................................................................96
Culvert End Treatments .........................................................................................................................99
3.14.1 General .................................................................................................................................. 99
3.14.2 Slope Faced ......................................................................................................................... 100
3.14.3 Traversable Endwalls ........................................................................................................... 100
Worked Examples ................................................................................................................................101
3.15.1 Example 1: Application of Culvert Design Procedure .......................................................... 101
3.15.2 Example 2: Culvert Outlet Protection ................................................................................... 107

Floodway Crossings ..........................................................................................................................110


Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................110
4.1.1 Design Parameters/Criteria .................................................................................................. 111
Design Considerations .........................................................................................................................112
4.2.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 112
4.2.2 Culvert Dimensions and Design Considerations for Culverts under the Floodway
Crossing ............................................................................................................................... 113
4.2.3 General Safety ..................................................................................................................... 115
4.2.4 Sight Distance ...................................................................................................................... 115
4.2.5 Horizontal Alignment ............................................................................................................ 116
4.2.6 Vertical Alignment ................................................................................................................ 116
4.2.7 Cross Section ....................................................................................................................... 118
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

4.2.8 Signage ................................................................................................................................ 120


4.2.9 Environmental Considerations ............................................................................................. 121
4.2.10 Hydraulic Flow Considerations ............................................................................................ 122
Hydraulic Design ..................................................................................................................................123
4.3.1 Flow Over the Road ............................................................................................................. 123
4.3.2 Full Floodway Crossing Calculations ................................................................................... 126
Time of Submergence and Closure ......................................................................................................128
4.4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 128
4.4.2 Calculating of Time of Submergence and Closure .............................................................. 130
4.4.3 Time Required to Reopen the Road after Flood Closures .................................................. 139
4.4.4 Costs of Flood Closures ....................................................................................................... 139
Flood Damage ......................................................................................................................................140
4.5.1 Flood Damage Examples ..................................................................................................... 140
Floodway Crossing Profiles ..................................................................................................................142
4.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 142
4.6.2 Types of Profiles .................................................................................................................. 142
Floodway Crossing Protection Examples .............................................................................................146
4.7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 146
4.7.2 Type 1 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin, Batter and Apron .............................. 146
4.7.3 Type 2 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin and Batter with No Apron .................. 147
4.7.4 Type 3 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin and Batter with Dished Apron ............ 148
4.7.5 Type 4 Floodway Crossing Protection – Stone Mattresses and Gabions ........................... 148
4.7.6 Type 5 Floodway Crossing Protection – Bituminous Seal ................................................... 149
4.7.7 Type 6 Floodway Crossing Protection – Dumped Riprap .................................................... 150
4.7.8 Grass Batters ....................................................................................................................... 152
Worked Examples ................................................................................................................................152
4.8.1 Example 1: Floodway Crossing Design ............................................................................... 152
4.8.2 Example 2: Floodway Crossing Design ............................................................................... 155

References 161

Vegetal Retardance Curves ..................................................................................................163

Austroads 2023 | page iv


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Inlet and Outlet Control Nomographs .................................................................................168


General .................................................................................................................................................168
Inlet Control ..........................................................................................................................................169
Outlet Control .......................................................................................................................................173

Velocity and Critical Depth ...................................................................................................179


General .................................................................................................................................................179

Culvert Capacity ....................................................................................................................186


Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................186
Socket End of Spigot and Socket Pipes .............................................................................. 186
Socket End of Spigot and Socket Pipes .............................................................................. 187
Flush Jointed Pipes .............................................................................................................. 188
Concrete Box Culverts ......................................................................................................... 189

Solving Manning’s Equation ................................................................................................190


Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................190
Application 1......................................................................................................................... 190
Application 2......................................................................................................................... 192
Application 3......................................................................................................................... 194

Tables
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Table 2.1: Manning’s n values for artificial channels/conduits .................................................................15


Table 2.2: Manning’s n values for natural channels ................................................................................16
Table 2.3: Guide to the selection of vegetal retardance ..........................................................................17
Table 2.4: Jump types and strength .........................................................................................................25
Table 2.5: Erosive velocities in natural streams ......................................................................................31
Table 2.6: Recommended maximum velocities (design) for consolidated, bare channels and
vegetated channels .................................................................................................................36
Table 2.7: Channel transition energy loss coefficients ............................................................................38
Table 3.1: Suggested culvert outlet velocities..........................................................................................78
Table 3.2: Culvert entry loss coefficient ...................................................................................................85
Table 4.1: Typical floodway crossing width requirements .....................................................................119
Table 4.2 Annual Time of Submergence – stream gauge analysis ......................................................133
Table 4.3: AAToS hydraulic modelling approach example ....................................................................138
Table 4.4: AAToS hydrologic modelling approach example ..................................................................138
Table 4.5: AAToS basic approach example...........................................................................................138
Table 4.6: Estimated values of travel time – occupant and freight payload values ...............................140
Table 4.7: Rock protection section thickness.........................................................................................151
Table 4.8: Rock Sizes ............................................................................................................................151
Table E 1: Uniform flow in circular sections flowing partly full................................................................197
Table E 2: Flow in trapezoidal channels by Manning’s Equation ...........................................................198

Figures
Figure 1.1: Flow chart of Guide to Road Design ......................................................................................... 2
Figure 2.1: Bare earth open channel ........................................................................................................... 4
Figure 2.2: Types of open drains ................................................................................................................ 6
Figure 2.3: Batter drain................................................................................................................................ 8
Figure 2.4: Bench drain ............................................................................................................................... 8
Figure 2.5: Contour drain ............................................................................................................................ 9
Figure 2.6: Swale ........................................................................................................................................ 9
Figure 2.7: Velocity distribution across the flow ........................................................................................11
Figure 2.8: Wetted perimeter.....................................................................................................................13

Austroads 2023 | page v


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.9: Stage-Discharge curve ...........................................................................................................18


Figure 2.10: Modified Stage-Discharge curve .............................................................................................19
Figure 2.11: Compound channel .................................................................................................................19
Figure 2.12: Comparing energy between points .........................................................................................21
Figure 2.13: Specific energy curve ..............................................................................................................22
Figure 2.14: Analysis curves and the hydraulic jump ..................................................................................25
Figure 2.15: Relation between Froude Number and depths of flow in a hydraulic jump ............................27
Figure 2.16: Sequent depth for trapezoidal channels (So ≤ 10%) ..............................................................28
Figure 2.17: Location of a hydraulic jump ...................................................................................................29
Figure 2.18: Length of hydraulic jump in terms of sequent depth (y2) in horizontal channels ....................30
Figure 2.19: Trapezoidal channel section ...................................................................................................34
Figure 2.20: Maximum rates of contraction and expansion ........................................................................38
Figure 2.21: Channel transition types .........................................................................................................39
Figure 2.22: Relationship between bed velocity and rock diameter............................................................43
Figure 2.23: Channel lined with rock filled wire mattresses ........................................................................44
Figure 2.24: Diagram of a baffle chute ........................................................................................................46
Figure 2.25: Median inlets with levees ........................................................................................................48
Figure 2.26: Typical table drains .................................................................................................................49
Figure 2.27: Table drain location and shape ...............................................................................................50
Figure 2.28: Typical catch drain with flat bottom .........................................................................................55
Figure 2.29: Catch drain with V shape diagram ..........................................................................................55
Figure 2.30: Catch bank diagram ................................................................................................................55
Figure 2.31: Concrete-lined catch drain ......................................................................................................56
Figure 2.32: Stage–Discharge curve ...........................................................................................................61
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Figure 3.1: Stream alignment options .......................................................................................................72


Figure 3.2: Stream alignment options (A and B) (preferred option A to avoid bank erosion) ...................72
Figure 3.3: Culvert grading options ...........................................................................................................73
Figure 3.4: Development of headwater .....................................................................................................79
Figure 3.5: Typical conditions under which standard culverts operate .....................................................81
Figure 3.6: Hydraulics of culvert flowing full under outlet control ..............................................................83
Figure 3.7: Determination of adopted outlet depth (ho) .............................................................................84
Figure 3.8 Form for culvert design calculations .......................................................................................87
Figure 3.9: Culvert design flow chart in steps 1 to 10 ...............................................................................88
Figure 3.10: Flow area for box culverts .......................................................................................................92
Figure 3.11: Flow area for pipe culverts ......................................................................................................92
Figure 3.12: Full flow/part flow table ...........................................................................................................94
Figure 3.13: Flow width in pipes ..................................................................................................................94
Figure 3.14: Flood water flowing into box culverts ......................................................................................96
Figure 3.15: Single pipe outlet minimum rock size and length of apron .....................................................98
Figure 3.16: Rock apron detail for single pipe outlet ...................................................................................98
Figure 3.17: Minimum rock size and length of apron for a multi-pipe outlet ...............................................99
Figure 3.18: Example of a slope faced and slope faced with grate culvert endwall .................................101
Figure 3.19: Channel cross-section ..........................................................................................................101
Figure 3.20: Road cross-section for worked example ...............................................................................102
Figure 3.21: Stage-Discharge curve for culvert design example ..............................................................103
Figure 3.22: Geometric detail of key parameters for worked example .....................................................103
Figure 3.23: Worksheet for example culvert design ..................................................................................106
Figure 3.24: Application of Figure 3.15 to worked example ......................................................................108
Figure 3.25: Solution to example for culvert outlet protection ...................................................................109
Figure 4.1: Functioning floodway crossings ............................................................................................110
Figure 4.2: Example of water flowing over the floodway crossing before the culverts
are running full ......................................................................................................................112
Figure 4.3: Floodway crossing failures ....................................................................................................113
Figure 4.4: Floodway crossings with two sets of culverts both in line with the flow ................................114
Figure 4.5: Results of poor driver assessment on entering the floodway crossing .................................115
Figure 4.6: Typical longitudinal section of floodway crossing in flat terrain ............................................117
Figure 4.7: Typical details of grading for standard floodway crossings ..................................................118

Austroads 2023 | page vi


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.8: Typical details of grading of standard floodway crossings in low formations .......................118
Figure 4.9: Road edge guidepost located in concrete batter ..................................................................121
Figure 4.10: Indicative velocities of flow over a typical floodway crossing ...............................................123
Figure 4.11: Discharge coefficients for flow over floodway crossings.......................................................125
Figure 4.12: Example floodway calculations .............................................................................................127
Figure 4.13: Time of submergence using flood hydrograph .....................................................................131
Figure 4.14: Time of submergence design storm temporal pattern ensemble .........................................132
Figure 4.15: Time of submergence – stream gauge data versus bridge level ..........................................133
Figure 4.16: Time of submergence for 20% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble ....................136
Figure 4.17: Time of submergence for 5% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble ......................137
Figure 4.18: Time of submergence for 1% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble ......................137
Figure 4.19: Flood damage examples .......................................................................................................141
Figure 4.20: Scour beyond downstream apron .........................................................................................141
Figure 4.21: Full protection, both upstream and downstream ...................................................................144
Figure 4.22: Significant protection, upstream shoulder and full downstream ...........................................144
Figure 4.23: Downstream protection .........................................................................................................144
Figure 4.24: Minimal protection .................................................................................................................145
Figure 4.25: Bed level crossing .................................................................................................................145
Figure 4.26: Type 1 floodway crossing protection – RC margin, batter and apron...................................146
Figure 4.27: Type 2 floodway crossing protection – RC margin and batter with no apron .......................147
Figure 4.28: Example of guard rail installation on floodway ......................................................................147
Figure 4.29: Examples of floodway crossing damage starting from the upstream side of the
floodway crossing..................................................................................................................148
Figure 4.30: Type 3 floodway crossing protection – RC margin and batter with dished apron ................148
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Figure 4.31: Type 4 floodway crossing protection – stone mattresses and gabions ................................149
Figure 4.32: Type 5 floodway crossing protection – bituminous seal .......................................................149
Figure 4.33 Type 6 floodway crossing protection – dumped riprap rock protection ................................150
Figure 4.34: Floodway crossing cross-section ..........................................................................................153
Figure 4.35: Details of example floodway crossing design .......................................................................157
Figure 4.36: Head on roadway ..................................................................................................................159

Austroads 2023 | page vii


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Introduction

Purpose

Austroads Guide to Road Design seeks to capture the contemporary road design practice of member
organisations (Guide to Road Design Part 1: Objectives of Road Design (Austroads 2021a)). In doing so, it
provides valuable guidance to designers in the production of safe, economical and efficient road designs.

The purpose of the Guide to Road Design Part 5: Drainage is to provide designers with guidance to
appropriately manage stormwater run-off through the design of an efficient and effective road drainage
system. This Guide comprises three parts:
• Part 5: Drainage – General and Hydrology Considerations (AGRD Part 5) (Austroads 2023).
• Part 5A: Drainage – Road Surface, Network, Basins and Subsurface (AGRD Part 5A) (Austroads 2023b).
• Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts, and Floodway Crossings (AGRD Part 5B).

AGRD Part 5 (Austroads 2023) of the Guide provides an introduction to the three parts, an overview of the
drainage considerations in undertaking a drainage design, safety considerations, environmental issues and
detailed guidance on the hydrologic assessment of a catchment. AGRD Part 5A (Austroads 2023b) provides
guidance on road surface flows, design of the pit and pipe systems and basins and introduction to the
major/minor flow concept.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The purpose of this Part is to provide road designers with guidance on the requirements for the design of
open channels, culverts and floodway crossings, to support the operation and management of the road
network.

The AGRD Part 5: Drainage is one of eight parts of the Guide to Road Design (see Figure 1.1) that provide
guidance on geometric design, intersection design, roadside design and geotechnical design, all of which
may influence the location and design of the drainage system.

Austroads 2023 | page 1


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 1.1: Flow chart of Guide to Road Design


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Scope of this Part

This Part describes the types of open channels, culverts and floodway crossings and provides design
procedures and guidance on best practice for the detailed design of these components of the drainage
system.

When used in conjunction with other relevant parts of the Guide provides the information and guidance
necessary for a road designer to prepare detailed design drawings that are adequate to facilitate the
construction of the drainage system.

Figure 1.1 outlines the structure of the Guide to Road Design. Designers should be aware that there are nine
other subject areas spanning the range of Austroads publications that may also be relevant to the design of
roads (www.austroads.com.au).

Austroads 2023 | page 2


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Road Safety

Adopting a Safe System approach to road safety recognises that humans as road users are fallible and will
continue to make mistakes, and that the community should not penalise people with death or serious injury
when they do make mistakes. In a Safe System, roads (and vehicles) should be designed to reduce the
incidence and severity of crashes when they inevitably occur.

The Safe System approach requires, in part:


• roads and roadsides designed and maintained to reduce the risk of crashes occurring and to lessen the
severity of injury if a crash does occur. Safe roads prevent unintended use through design and encourage
safe behaviour by users
• forgiving environments that prevent serious injury or death when crashes occur
• speed limits that complement the road environment to manage crash impact forces to within human
tolerance; and all road users complying with the speed limits.

In New Zealand, practical steps have been taken to give effect to similar guiding principles through a Safety
Management Systems (SMS) approach.

Road designers should be aware of and through the design process, actively support the philosophy and
road safety objectives covered in the Guide to Road Safety.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 3


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Open Drains and Channels

Introduction

2.1.1 Definition and Use

An open channel is defined as a conduit or conveyance (artificial or natural) in which water flows with a free
surface. A free surface means that the surface is open to the atmosphere and/or there is no additional
pressure on the flow other than atmospheric pressure. Flow is caused by gravity and streams tend to follow
the path of least resistance.

Open channels can be economical where large flows are to be carried and space is not restricted. An
example of a newly constructed, open channel is shown in Figure 2.1. This channel would then be treated to
avoid erosion, e.g. grassed.

Figure 2.1: Bare earth open channel


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Open channels may be constructed to achieve one of three main functions:


• to capture and convey run-off originating from the road formation – e.g. table drains forming part of the
road drainage system where space within the road reserve is sufficient
• to capture and convey overland flows before they reach the road formation, including catch drains at the
top of cut batters to prevent scour of the embankments or side drains to intercept sheet flows and protect
the road drainage system from inundation
• to capture and convey flows beneath the road formation, including flows from the outlets of culverts or
other drainage infrastructure.

Austroads 2023 | page 4


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

This section focuses on the analysis and design of smaller natural streams and creeks and constructed
drains and channels. Assessment of larger streams, creeks, rivers and floodplains is complex and should be
referred to specialists in hydraulics and river engineering. Where open channels are located adjacent to a
road, they should be designed to cater for errant vehicles, see the Guide to Road Design Part 3: Geometric
Design (AGRD Part 3) (Austroads 2016) and the Guide to Road Design Part 6: Roadside Design, Safety and
Barriers (AGRD Part 6) (Austroads 2022).

2.1.2 Factors in Choice of Channel Type

In choosing the type of channel to be adopted, consideration should be given to:


• capacity
• erosion
• maintenance.

Capacity

The channel should have adequate capacity for the design flow.

Erosion

Erosion control is a necessary part of good drainage design. Scour may occur unless the channel is
protected where velocities exceed those likely to cause erosion to the material forming the channel. Erosion
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

control involves the selection of a suitable and economical channel lining (including vegetative cover) which
will give the desired protection.

For further information on erosion control see AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.6. The type of lining should be
consistent with the degree of protection required, overall cost including maintenance, safety requirements
and aesthetic considerations. Erosion control in the form of grass growth may be used in combination with
other types of lining. A channel may be grass lined on the flatter slopes and lined with a more scour resistant
material on the steeper slopes.

Maintenance

Without proper maintenance, a well-designed channel becomes unsightly and will perform unsatisfactorily at
the design flow. Maintenance methods should be considered in the design of drainage channels so that the
type of channel section adopted will be suitable for the methods and equipment that will be used for
maintenance.

2.1.3 Environmental Consultation

Creeks and waterways disturbed by construction work should be left in a way that the channel will continue
to behave in a hydraulic and ecological manner similar to that of the undisturbed natural stream. New open
channels must be appropriately integrated into the surrounding ecological, visual, social and physical
environments.

Environment and drainage authorities should be consulted early in the road planning process as they may
have special requirements for existing channels which may relate to:
• soil conservation programs
• stream rehabilitation or restoration plans
• riparian improvement programs
• natural channel design programs

Austroads 2023 | page 5


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• other programs relating to ecological sustainability.

2.1.4 Types of Open Drains

Figure 2.2 shows an example of a typical open drain network associated with a road alignment and the
following section provides an outline of each of types of open drains.

Figure 2.2: Types of open drains

B Drain type B Drain type B

Drain type C
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Notes:
Drain type A – Diversion drain.
Drain type B – Side drain.
Drain type C – Table drain.

Table drains

Table drains are located along the outer edge of the road shoulder in cuts, and beside shallow raised
carriageways in fill. They collect run-off from the pavement, shoulders and cut batters and convey the flows
to a suitable outfall, which could be via a diversion drain or to a culvert.

Diversion drains

The purpose of diversion drains is to convey water collected within the table drain to the designated drainage
outlet. Appropriate outlets include side drains, creeks, or even the open countryside, with run-off spilling back
out to overland flow.

The spacing of diversion drains should be such that the flow in a table drain does not exceed the capacity of
the table drain. Often for simplicity diversion drains may be spaced on set intervals.

Flows which may cause problems in one location can be redirected using diversion drains. Diversion drains
may be employed to ensure that water volumes do not reach velocities sufficient to cause significant
damage.

In order to ensure effective diversion of stormwater away from the table drain, table drain blocks may be
placed immediately downstream of its confluence with the diversion drain.

Austroads 2023 | page 6


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Catch drains

Catch drains (sometimes known as cut-off drains) intercept the surface water at the top of cut batters in order
to prevent rilling (the forming of small channels across the surface), erosion or scouring of the batter slope.
This type of drain is usually about 0.3 m deep, but capacity should also be checked. Alternatively, catch
drains placed at the bottom of fill slopes intercept water from adjacent properties as well as convey road
drainage to an outlet. This type has a flat bottom 2.0 to 2.5 m wide and a depth sufficient to carry the design
flow.

In erodible soils, the catch drain may take the form of a low levee bank along the top of the batter. In such
soils, a drain cut into the surface may rapidly erode and enlarge itself, or cause local slips in the batter by
piping. These issues need to be addressed in the location and design of catch drains. V-shaped drains are
not preferred and should not be used in erodible soils.

Side drains

The main purpose of side drains is to isolate the road from run-off generated from adjoining areas. They are
often constructed as a small levee when it is undesirable to excavate a drain.

Median drains

Median drains collect run-off from the roadway pavement and median and direct the flow to the pavement
drainage system. The main limitation on median drains relates to safe slopes for errant vehicles. A desirable
side slope of one in 10 or flatter severely restricts the capacity of such drains unless the median is very wide.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Road safety requirements may result in the median drain being augmented by grated pits and underground
pipes.

Inlet or outlet drains

These drains direct water towards the culvert inlet on the upstream side and convey water away from the
culvert outlet and surrounding area on the downstream side. They are commonly used where the inlet or
outlet invert heights of the culvert are below the natural surface. In such cases the length of drain required is
determined by ‘daylighting’ the drain, i.e. construction of a drain at a set slope until it breaks out (daylights) at
the natural surface.

Batter drains

A batter drain, also known as a slope drain, is a lined open drain for removing stormwater from the top to the
toe of the batter in order to reduce scour of the batter face, as shown in Figure 2.3. They are spaced at
intervals that meet the maximum flow width criteria.

Further information on these drains identified above is contained in Section 2.12 – Edge Drains and Median
Drains to Section 2.15 – Catch Drains and Catch Banks.

Austroads 2023 | page 7


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.3: Batter drain

Source: D House (used with permission).

Bench drains

A bench drain is provided for the bench (i.e. ledge) that is constructed on a batter, or natural slope. The
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

purpose of benches is to reduce erosion to the batter faces, reduce the amount of water in cuttings to be
carried by table drains and in some cases to also improve sight distance on horizontal curves. Bench drains
carry water from the bench to suitable drainage outlets. An example of a bench drain is shown in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2.4: Bench drain

Source: Austroads (2016).

Contour drain

A contour drain, also known as a contour bank, is a surface drain designed to slow the rate of run-off by
diverting water along a gently sloped path, from a site to nearby stable areas, at a discharge velocity that will
not cause erosion. An example is shown in Figure 2.5.

Austroads 2023 | page 8


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.5: Contour drain

Source: RTA (1993).


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Swales

Vegetation can be used to provide the filtering surface area to spread and reduce flow velocities that allows
sedimentation as well as providing a substrate for biofilm growth and hence biological uptake of soluble
pollutants. An example of a swale drain is shown in Figure 2.6.

Figure 2.6: Swale

Source: D House (used with permission).

Austroads 2023 | page 9


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

General Considerations

The design considerations for an open channel include:


• hydrological analysis to determine the discharge for the proposed open drain or channel design
• establishing the ecological requirements for the channel such as
– determining the specific or generic riparian management requirements
– stream bank stability or erosion guidelines
– water quality requirements
– natural channel design requirements
– use of the channel by fauna as a fishway or wildlife corridor
• obtaining permits that may be required for any work in, or over a waterway
• optimising the longitudinal slope of the channel. To reduce the velocity, a flatter slope than that existing
may be adopted by introducing drop structures or meanders. However, shortening the natural channel
alignment will increase velocities
• determining the width available for an open channel
• assessing the geotechnical requirements for the drain or channel side slope stability
• assessing the need for channel lining, particularly for erosion resistance, including vegetation selection
and aesthetics. Ensure future maintainability of lining is considered
• calculating flow characteristics. Design for subcritical flow; see Section 2.3.5 for guidance on Specific
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Energy and Froude’s Number. Supercritical flow with its highly erosive velocities should be avoided in a
design flood, except at channel drops or energy dissipators (see Section 2.10 – Channel Drops)
• assessing and ensuring the safety of an open channel
• providing access for maintenance.

Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow

2.3.1 Stream Dynamics

It is important to have a basic understanding of how streams work or behave to ensure that the planning and
design of drainage infrastructure is appropriate and will work not only immediately after the work is
completed, but also in the future.

Streams are constantly changing and responding to external factors and are therefore dynamic. However, to
simplify analysis and design, it is assumed that the stream cross-section is fixed, and uniform flow conditions
occur, that is, the stream is divided into small, isolated parts and/or sections and the flow within the channel
is analysed at a point in time.

Streams and roads

Human interference can easily change or affect streams and it is critical to understand that changes can
affect stream behaviour both upstream and downstream.

Typical encroachments that would affect normal stream flow as related to road infrastructure are:
• roadway embankments
• cross drainage culverts
• floodway crossings
• bridges.

Austroads 2023 | page 10


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Governing parameters

All streams are governed by the same basic parameters:


• geological factors – soil conditions
• hydrological factors – rainfall
• geometric – channel slope and crossfall
• hydraulic – fluid properties
• vegetation – native vegetation in channels/along banks.

Velocity distribution

Flow velocities within a stream are not uniformly distributed across the cross-section. They are slowest
adjacent to the channel bed and banks, where the friction forces are highest. The highest velocities are
found just below the free surface in the deepest part of the flow.

Figure 2.7 illustrates the velocity distribution across channel flow. To map water particles of equal velocity,
isovels are drawn (isovels trace equal velocity similar to contour lines tracing equal ground height).

Figure 2.7: Velocity distribution across the flow


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Types and states of flow

Open channel flow can be described in a number of ways. The following outlines the types of flow:
• Steady flow – is where the depth of flow at the same point does not change over time.
• Unsteady flow – is where the depth of flow at the same point does change over time.
• Uniform flow – is where the depth of flow is the same at every cross-section along the channel. This is
really only possible when the channel flow cross-section, slope and roughness remain constant.
• Non-uniform or varied flow – is where the depth of flow changes along the length of channel. Varied
flow can be further described as either rapid or gradual (i.e. in artificial channels).

Austroads 2023 | page 11


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The following outlines the states of flow:


• Laminar flow – is where the water particles appear to move in smooth paths or in very thin sheets
(laminas) over the top of each other. Laminar flow is very smooth flow and is rarely seen in the natural
environment.
• Turbulent flow – is where the water particles move in very irregular paths. White water rapids are good
examples of turbulent flow.

Open channel flow can occur as a variety or combination of these types and states.

2.3.2 Assumptions for Analysis

Due to the dynamic nature of open channel flow, it is difficult to model and/or analyse the flow as it occurs in
the natural environment a number of assumptions are made to enable and simplify analysis. These
assumptions are considered reasonable and valid in the context of the analysis and design procedures
described in this Guide.

The assumptions made are:


• steady flow
• uniform flow
• velocity is averaged over the whole cross-section
• flow is non-turbulent.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Generally, these assumptions can be applied to most situations encountered in design. However, where it is
obvious that the assumptions cannot be applied, the analysis and/or design should be referred to a suitably
qualified specialist.

2.3.3 Fundamental Equations

The most basic equation in the analysis of open channel flow defines the relationship between flow rate
(discharge), velocity and the cross-sectional area of flow and is represented by Equation 1:

𝑄 =𝑉x𝐴 1

where

Q = Flow rate (m/s)

V = Average velocity (m/s)

A = Cross-sectional area of flow (m2)

This equation also forms the basis of the theory behind the Continuity Equation.

The theory allows simple analysis over changes in the channel irrespective of cross-section, slope or
roughness. The theory assumes no addition to or subtraction from the flow between the two sections being
considered (i.e. Equation 2: Q1 = Q2).

𝑄1 = 𝑉1 x 𝐴1 = 𝑉2 x 𝐴2 = 𝑄2 2

Austroads 2023 | page 12


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The formula most commonly used for the calculation of steady, uniform flow in open channels is Manning’s
Equation. This equation is used to determine the velocity of flow at a specific point in the channel, and
therefore the variables in the equation must be representative of the point being assessed.

Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) is:

2⁄ 1⁄ 3
R 3S 2
V=
𝑛
where

V = Average velocity (m/s)

R = Hydraulic radius (m)

S = Slope of energy line (m/m)

𝑛 = Manning’s roughness coefficient

The hydraulic radius is given by Equation 4:

𝐴 4
𝑅=
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝑃
where

A = Cross-sectional area (m2)

P = Wetted perimeter (m)

In determining the hydraulic radius, the wetted perimeter is defined as the length of line (normal to the flow)
where the water touches the surface of the ground (channel) (Figure 2.8).

Figure 2.8: Wetted perimeter

Source: DTMR (2010.)

A worked example of the application of Manning’s Equation, is shown in Section 2.16.1 – Example 1:
Manning’s Equation. Refer also to Appendix E.

Austroads 2023 | page 13


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

For natural channels the slope of the energy line, S, is almost impossible to determine. Therefore, a suitable
estimation of S is required. The slope of the water (flow) surface, Sw, could be used, however this is also
difficult to determine. The only easily available slope that can be used to estimate S is the channel bed, So,
provided that the channel and the bed slope are reasonably uniform near the point being assessed. If the
channel shape and bed slope is irregular, Manning’s Equation will not give acceptable results and therefore
the analysis and design should be referred to a suitably qualified hydraulics practitioner.

In applying Manning’s Equation, particularly to natural channels, the greatest difficulty lies in the
determination of the roughness coefficient n. For artificial channels values of n can be obtained from Table
2.1.

For natural channels, use the values of n in Table 2.2: based on type and amount of vegetation present. For
artificial channels, e.g. conduits or lined channels, the determination of n must consider the roughness of
both the lining and jointing system.

For grassed channels, and where the hydraulic radius for the flow is less than 1 m, vegetal retardance
curves (see Appendix A) should be used to determine n, when the flow depth is greater than the height of
the grass. Table 2.3: is used to determine the appropriate vegetal retardance curve to be used.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 14


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 2.1: Manning’s n values for artificial channels/conduits

Type of structure n
1. Closed conduits
1. Concrete pipe 0.011–0.013
2. Corrugated metal pipe or pipe-arch (small corrugation)
(a) plain or unpaved 0.024
(b) paved invert – full flow
25% circumference paved 0.021
50% circumference paved 0.018
Fully paved 0.012
3. Structural plate pipe or pipe-arch 0.030–0.033
4. Monolithic concrete (box culvert) 0.012
5. Vitrified clay pipe 0.012
2. Open channels – lined
1. Concrete – smooth forms or trowelled 0.012
2. Asphalt
(a) Smooth 0.013
(b) Rough 0.016
3. Open channels – excavated (straight alignment and natural lining)
1. Earth – uniform section
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

(a) Clean – new to weathered 0.016–0.020


(b) With short grass, few weeds 0.022–0.027
(c) In gravelly soil, clean 0.022–0.025
2. Earth – uniform section
(a) No vegetation 0.022–0.025
(b) Grass, some weeds 0.025–0.030
(c) Dense weeds or plants in deep channel 0.030–0.035
(d) Sides clean, gravel bottom 0.025–0.030
(e) Sides clean, cobble bottom 0.030–0.040
3. Dragline excavated or dredged
(a) No vegetation 0.028–0.033
(b) Light bush on banks 0.035–0.050
4. Channels not maintained, weeds and brush uncut
(a) Dense weeds, high as flow depth 0.08–0.12
(b) Clean bottom, brush on sides 0.05–0.08
(c) Same, highest stage of flow 0.07–0.11
(d) Dense brush, high stage 0.10–0.14

Source: Based on Herr and Bossy, 1965. Item 1(b) and 1(c) have been added based on values recommended by
Maccaferri in their publications (cited in DTMR 2010, pp. 8–6).

Austroads 2023 | page 15


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 2.2: Manning’s n values for natural channels

Type of channel n

1. Main channel
1. Fairly regular section
(a) Some grass and weeds, little or no brush 0.030–0.035
(b) Dense growth of weeds, depth of flow materially greater than weed height 0.035–0.05
(c) Some weeds, light brush on banks 0.035–0.05
(d) Some weeds, heavy brush on banks 0.05–0.07
(e) Some weeds, dense willows on banks 0.06–0.08
(f) Trees within channel with branches submerged at high stage Add 0.01–0.02
2. Irregular Section, with pools, slight channel meander Add 0.01–0.02
To (a) to (f) above as applicable
3. Mountain streams, no vegetation in channel, banks usually steep, trees and
brush along banks submerged at high stage
(a) Bottom, gravel, shingle and few boulders 0.04–0.05
(b) Bottom, shingle with large boulders 0.05–0.07
2. Adjacent flood channels
1. Pasture, no brush
(a) Short grass 0.030–0.035
(b) High grass 0.035–0.05
2. Cultivated areas
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

(a) No crop 0.03–0.04


(b) Mature row crops 0.035–0.045
(c) Mature field crops 0.04–0.05
3. Heavy weeds, scattered brush 0.05–0.07
4. Light brush and trees 0.06–0.08
5. Medium to dense brush 0.10–0.16
6. Dense willows, summer, not bent over by current 0.15–0.20
7. Cleared land with tree stumps (250 to 450 per ha)
(a) No sprouts 0.04–0.05
(b) With heavy growth of sprouts 0.06–0.08
8. Heavy stand of timber, a few fallen trees, little undergrowth
(a) Flood depth below branches 0.10–0.12
(b) Flood depth reaches branches 0.12–0.16
Major Streams (surface width at flood stage > 30 m)
Roughness coefficient is usually less than for minor streams of similar description 0.12–0.16
on account of less effect offered by irregular banks or vegetation on banks.
Values of n may be somewhat reduced. The value of n for large streams of
mostly regular section may be in the range.

Source: Based on DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 16


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 2.3: Guide to the selection of vegetal retardance

Density of Average length


Degree of
stand (see of vegetation Examples
retardance
Note 1) (mm)
Thick Longer than 750 A Rhodes grass in ungrazed scrub soil waterway.
Thick 280 to 610 B Wheat 660 mm tall in 180 mm rows Rhodes grass.
B Kikuyu under maximum fertility conditions, long and green.
B African star grass. Lucerne (see Note 2).
Thick 150 to 250 C Most grasses can be held at this retardance with mowing or
grazing e.g. Rhodes grass, couch grass, carpet grass, native
grasses.
Thick 50 to 150 D African star grass, kikuyu or couch grass, all under heavy
grazing.
Thick Less than 50 E Mowed lawn. Any grass burned short.
Fair Longer than 750 B –
Fair 280 to 610 C Rhodes grass under low fertility conditions .
Fair 150 to 250 D African star grass under low fertility conditions.
Fair 50 to 150 D –
Fair Less than 50 E –

Note: Values of n = 0.15 and greater have been used for fields of standing sugar cane.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

1 Thickness of vegetation has an important bearing on retardance, possibly more important than species.
2 Vegetal retardance curves have been based on tests in experimental channels.
Source: Based on Soil Conservation Handbook and Kouwen et al. (cited in DTMR 2010, p. 8–9).

It is important to understand that the depth and velocity of any given flow in a channel operating under
normal, or natural conditions, are called the Normal Depth and Normal Velocity. The depth and velocity of
flow as determined using Manning’s Equation are the Normal Depth and Normal Velocity.

2.3.4 Application of Fundamental Equations

The primary usage of the fundamental equations is to ensure the design discharge can be accommodated
within the designed open drain or channel to the specified freeboard criteria and determine the basic flow
characteristics of a given channel. These characteristics are:
• maximum flow capacity of the channel
• velocity of flow when at maximum capacity
• depth of flow for a specific discharge
• velocity of flow for a specific discharge.

To determine these characteristics, a representative cross-section for the channel needs to be chosen as
well as channel slope (So) and Manning’s n value.

Manning’s Equation gives the velocity of flow in a channel based on a selected depth of flow (which enables
calculation of the cross-sectional area of flow and wetted perimeter). To determine the flow rate (Q), for the
selected depth of flow and using velocity as determined by Manning’s Equation, use the fundamental
equation, Equation 1, which is repeated here:
𝑄 =𝑉x𝐴

If the selected depth of flow was based on the maximum capacity of the channel, the first two characteristics,
as listed above, have now been determined.

Austroads 2023 | page 17


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

To determine the last two characteristics, a Stage-Discharge curve (also known as a rating curve) is
required. A Stage-Discharge curve plots the depth of flow against the flow rate at a particular cross-section
along a stream/channel. To plot a Stage-Discharge curve, a series of iterations of the above
calculations/process is required, with depths selected from zero to maximum capacity.

The curve is plotted using depth of flow for the x-axis and flow rate for the y-axis (Figure 2.9).

Figure 2.9: Stage-Discharge curve


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

To use the Stage-Discharge curve to determine the depth of flow for a specific discharge, plot the required
flow rate (Qy) onto the left y-axis and extend across the graph to the flow line and then project down to the x-
axis. To determine the velocity of this flow, the cross-sectional area of the flow needs to be calculated using
the determined depth of flow

However, the Stage-Discharge curve can be easily modified to include velocity by plotting the graph using
depth of flow for the x-axis, the flow rate for the left y-axis and velocity for the right y-axis (Figure 2.10).

To use the Modified Stage-Discharge curve to determine the depth and velocity of flow for a specific
discharge, plot the required flow rate (Qy) onto the left y-axis and extend across the graph to the flow line and
then project down to the x-axis, to determine depth, and up/down to the velocity line and then across to the
right y-axis to determine velocity.

The advantage in using a Stage-Discharge curve is that the curve can be used to determine the depth and
velocity of flows for several annual recurrence intervals. It should be noted that the Stage-Discharge curve is
linked to the channel characteristics. Should the analysis shift to a different location where channel
parameters are different (slope, shape n-value and so on), a new Stage-Discharge curve will be required.

Austroads 2023 | page 18


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.10: Modified Stage-Discharge curve

Source: DTMR (2010).


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

A worked example of the application of Manning’s Equation and the use of a Stage-Discharge curve is
shown in Section 2.16.2 – Example 2: Manning’s Equation.

Compound channels

Simple channels are often represented as a basic trapezoid (see Figure 2.7), assessed using one Manning’s
n-value and/or based on one slope. This methodology is reasonable for simple, small channels. In reality, the
shape of channels is not a basic trapezoid. They are compound in shape with:
• high and low banks with possible small overflow sections
• different n-values for banks and channel bed
• potentially different slopes between the main channel and overflow sections.

Assessment of compound channels uses the same principle and methodology as described earlier in this
section; however, the channel cross-section is first divided into smaller sub-sections.

Figure 2.11 shows, a compound channel divided into two sub-sections (labelled A and B).

Figure 2.11: Compound channel

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 19


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Each section is analysed individually using Manning’s Equation to determine flow velocity based on the
parameters (S or So, n, A and P) specific to the sub-section. It is important to understand that the wetted
perimeter (P) is determined by the length of the ‘Water/Channel Boundary’ for the sub-section. The wetted
perimeter is the component of the equation where effect of friction is applied. The ‘Water/Water boundary’,
as shown by the red dashed line in Figure 2.11, is not to be included as the friction along this boundary is
negligible.

Once all sub-sections have been calculated, the total flow rate can be determined by Equation 5:

𝑄𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 = 𝑉𝐴 x 𝐴𝐴 + 𝑉𝐵 x 𝐴𝐵 5

Review of the calculations shows that each section has a different average velocity. While an average
velocity can be calculated using QTotal and the cross-sectional area of the whole channel (AA + AB), the
different velocities across the channel represent reality reasonably well.

A worked example for a compound channel is shown in Section 2.16.3 – Example 3: Manning’s Equation.

2.3.5 Energy Principles

The energy in open channel flow can be expressed as the total head in metres (m) of water, which is equal
to the sum of the elevation above a datum (elevation head), the hydrostatic head and the velocity head. The
elevation head and hydrostatic head are components collectively known as the static head.

In conventional terms, energy has two components:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• potential energy
• kinetic energy.

Relating conventional terms to the energy within water, potential energy is equal to the static head and
kinetic energy is equal to the velocity head. As an example, a static body of water such as a lake, has
potential energy while a moving body of water such as a creek, has both potential energy and kinetic energy.

Energy equation

The total energy for an open channel section is given by Equation 6:

𝑉2 6
𝐻 = (𝑧 + 𝑑) +
2𝑔

where

𝐻 = Total energy head (m)

𝑧 = Height of channel bed above some reference datum (m), known as elevation head

𝑑 = Depth of flow normal to the direction of flow (m), known as hydrostatic head

𝑉 = Velocity of flow (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

The term V2/2g within this equation is known as the velocity head.

Austroads 2023 | page 20


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

According to Chow and Henderson (both cited in DTMR 2010) the variable d describes the depth of flow
normal to the direction of flow (typically perpendicular to the channel bed).

It is important to understand that this equation differs slightly from the normal form of the energy equation for
open channels, which is Equation 7:

𝑉2 7
𝐻 = (𝑧 + 𝑑 cos 𝜃) + 𝛼
2𝑔

where

𝜃 = Slope angle of channel bed

𝛼 = Coefficient accounting for velocity distribution

Channels assessed for the installation of cross drainage culverts are relatively flat and therefore θ can be
assumed to be zero.

Referring to Section 2.3.2 – Assumptions for Analysis, the velocity is averaged across the section of flow,
therefore, α is equal to 1.

The energy equation is useful when comparing two sections within a channel. Typically, as water flows along
a channel, energy is lost. However, the first law of thermodynamics is that energy can neither be created nor
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

destroyed.

Therefore, when comparing the energy between two sections, the relationship can be expressed with
Equation 8:

𝑉12 𝑉22 8
(𝑧1 + 𝑑1 ) + = (𝑧2 + 𝑑2 ) + + ℎ𝐿
2𝑔 2𝑔

where

ℎ𝐿 = Head loss (m)

This is best illustrated in Figure 2.12.

Figure 2.12: Comparing energy between points

2
1
2
2
2
2

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 21


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Specific energy

Specific energy is defined as the energy per unit mass of water at any section, measured with respect to the
channel bed. Equation 9, the Specific Energy (Es) equation (which is essentially a sub-component of the
energy equation), is:

𝑉2
𝐸𝑠 = y + 9
2𝑔

where

y = Flow depth (m)

𝑉 = Velocity of flow (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

When the depth of flow is plotted against the specific energy for a given channel section and discharge (only
bed slope changes from flat to steep), a specific energy curve is obtained, as shown in Figure 2.13. The
curve shows that for a given specific energy (Es), there are two possible (conjugate) depths called alternate
depths y1 and y2.

Figure 2.13: Specific energy curve


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

2
1
2
2 1
2

2
2 2
2
2
2 2 2 2
2 2
2 2

2
1
= +
2
Source: Franzini and Finnemore (1997) (cited in DTMR 2010).

At point C on the curve, the specific energy is at a minimum and there is only one depth. The depth
corresponding to this point is known as the critical depth, yc. The corresponding velocity is the critical velocity
(Vc) and the slope is the critical slope (Sc).

When the depth of flow is greater than the critical depth, the flow velocity is less than the critical velocity and
is referred to as subcritical flow. When the depth of flow is less than the critical depth, the flow is
supercritical, and the velocity will be greater than the critical velocity. Subcritical flow is controlled by
downstream channel conditions, while supercritical flow is controlled from some upstream control condition.

Austroads 2023 | page 22


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Froude’s Number

Another simpler method to determine subcritical/supercritical flow is by determining Froude’s Number (Fr) for
the flow.

Froude’s Number is a dimensionless number, the ratio of the inertial forces to gravitational forces, and is
defined as:

𝑉 10
𝐹𝑟 =
√𝑔𝐿

where

𝑉 = Velocity of flow (m/s)

𝑔 = Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/s2)

𝐿 = Characteristic length (m)

The characteristic length (L) in open channel flow is equal to the hydraulic depth, which is defined as the
cross-sectional area of flow divided by the surface width of flow (A/B). Using either the hydraulic depth or
flow rate for the stream, there are two commonly used forms of the above Equation 10, shown here in
Equation 11:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝑉 11
𝐹𝑟 =
√𝑔 (𝐴⁄𝐵)

and 𝐹𝑟 = 𝑄 √𝐵⁄
(𝑔𝐴3 )

where

𝐴 = Cross-sectional area of flow normal to direction of flow (m2)

𝐵 = Width of flow at surface (m)

𝑉 = Velocity of flow (m/s)

𝑄 = Flow rate (m3/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

These equations are valid for irregular channel/stream conditions.

Froude’s Number indicates the state of flow. Critical flow occurs when Fr = 1. When Fr is greater than 1, the
flow is supercritical, and when it is less than 1 the flow is subcritical. When Fr is close to 1 (> 0.9 and < 1.1)
the flow state is unstable and waves appear on the water surface.

It is recommended that design achieves a Froude Number less than 0.9 (subcritical flow). For an example of
application of Froude’s Number see Step 7 in Section 2.3.6 – Hydraulic Jump.

For a description of the subcritical and supercritical flows, see Specific energy earlier in this section.

Austroads 2023 | page 23


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.3.6 Hydraulic Jump

A hydraulic jump is an abrupt rise of the water surface which occurs when flow changes from supercritical to
subcritical in response to a downstream control condition causing a higher tailwater height. The rapid (and
turbulent) rise of water dissipates energy. The turbulence persists for some length after the rise before
settling.

The rise and trailing turbulence is called the ‘roller’ and is shown between points 1 and 2 on Figure 2.14. The
depth y1, before the hydraulic jump, is called the initial depth, and the depth y2, after the jump, is called the
sequent depth.

The sequent depth is always lower than the high stage alternate depth, y2, due to the loss of energy, ΔE, in
the turbulence of the hydraulic jump. Due to this loss of energy, the solution to hydraulic jump problems
cannot be found using the Specific Energy curve alone. The principle of momentum must also be used to
develop a Specific Force or Force Momentum curve as shown in Figure 2.14.

The detailed analysis of hydraulic jumps is difficult and complex and full analysis of jumps should therefore
be undertaken by an experienced hydraulic specialist.

However, several models based on accepted theory, experimentation, laboratory testing in rectangular
channels and observation, have been developed to approximate key parameters of hydraulic jumps in
irregular open channels.

These simple methods are considered reasonable for analysing undular and weak hydraulic jumps (see
Jump strength, below) and are suitable for use by designers.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Specific force

As mentioned above, the solution to hydraulic jump problems cannot be found using the Specific Energy
curve alone. The hydraulic jump involves internal energy losses which cannot be simply evaluated using the
energy equation and therefore the use of the momentum principle is required.

In applying the momentum principle to a short horizontal reach of a prismatic channel, the Specific Force (F)
can be defined with Equation 12:

𝑄2 12
𝐹= + 𝑦̂
𝑔𝐴

where

𝑄 = Discharge (m3/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

𝐴 = Area of cross-section (m2)

𝑦̂ = Depth to the centre of gravity to cross-section (m)

Austroads 2023 | page 24


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.14: Analysis curves and the hydraulic jump

Source: Chow (cited in DTMR 2010).

The first term is the momentum of the flow passing through the channel section per unit time, per unit weight
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

of water. The second is the force per unit weight of water.

An examination of Figure 2.14 shows that while water flows at a depth (y1) for a given discharge (Q) in any
channel, there will always be another depth where the sum of the force due to velocity plus the hydrostatic
pressure for both depths will be the same.

This means that the specific forces of sections 1 and 2 are equal, provided that the external forces and the
weight effect of water can be ignored. This generally can be applied to horizontal channels with small bed
slopes (So ≤ 10%).

With respect to the rule that there are always two depths, the exception is at critical depth (points C’ & C)
where energy is at a minimum and there is only one depth of flow.

Jump strength

Hydraulic jumps can only form if the upstream flow is supercritical (i.e. has a Froude Number greater than 1).
As Froude’s Number increases, the strength of the jump also increases.

Table 2.4 lists the different types of jump and their defining characteristics. This table has been derived from
research studies undertaken in 1955 by the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation (cited in DTMR 2010).

Table 2.4: Jump types and strength

Jump type Fr Energy dissipated Characteristics


Undular 1.0–1.7 < 5% Very weak jump; standing waves
Weak 1.7–2.5 5–15% Weak jump; small roller; smooth rise
Oscillating 2.5–4.5 15–45% Unstable – avoid
Steady 4.5–9.0 45–70% Stable, well defined jump; best design range
Strong > 9.0 70–85% Choppy; very turbulent; intermittent

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 25


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Sequent depth in horizontal channels (SO ≤ 10%)

The parameters of the supercritical, upstream flow before the hydraulic jump are known/can be determined.
These parameters are flow velocity, flow depth and Froude Number.

Using these parameters, the alternate or sequent depth (y2) can be determined, considering:
• energy and momentum principles
• using the initial flow velocity as V1
• using the initial flow depth as y1
• experiments using a rectangular channel.

Rectangular channels

Equation 13 was developed to calculate the sequent depth (y2) in a rectangular channel:

𝑦2 1 13
= ( √1 + 8 𝐹𝑟2 − 1)
𝑦1 2

This can be expressed as:

𝑦1
𝑦2 = (√1 + 8𝐹𝑟2 − 1)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

and Froude’s Number (Equation 10)

𝑉1
𝐹𝑟 = ⁄ (rectangular section)
√𝑔 𝑦1

This relationship is shown graphically in Figure 2.15.

Austroads 2023 | page 26


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.15: Relation between Froude Number and depths of flow in a hydraulic jump
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Chow (cited in DTMR 2010).

Trapezoidal channels

The determination of sequent depth (y2) in a trapezoidal channel of reasonably small bed slope (So ≤ 10%),
requires an iterative solution. However, when applying the Specific Energy and Specific Force equations, it is
possible to arrange these equations into a dimensionless form, allowing solution by means of a table.

Figure 2.16 assists the designer with the calculation of the sequent depth (depth after the jump). This has
been derived from the Handbook of Hydraulics, 7th Ed, 1996 by Brater et al. (cited in DTMR 2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 27


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.16: Sequent depth for trapezoidal channels (So ≤ 10%)


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

y2 = J x Esj

Source: Brater et al. (cited in DTMR 2010).

Sequent depth sloping channels (So > 10%)

While the effect of the weight of water in the jump is negligible for horizontal channels (So ≤ 10%), it is
essential to consider it in the analysis of hydraulic jumps in sloping channels (So > 10%). For channels
> 10 % advice from specialist hydraulic engineers should be obtained.

Austroads 2023 | page 28


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Location of jump

The location of the jump is dependent primarily on the momentum of flow before and after the jump and can
occur either before or after the ‘trigger’ situation that causes the initial supercritical flow to ‘slow’ to subcritical
flow.

Figure 2.17 shows a channel having a ‘break’ in the bed slope (steep to mild slope) and two possible
locations for the jump. If the sequent depth y2 is greater than the alternate depth y′1, (see Section 2.3.5 –
Energy Principles) the jump will occur in the steep region. If the sequent depth y2 is lowered to less than
approximately the alternate depth y′1, the jump will start to move into the mild channel.

Generally, for undular and weak jumps and where channels have a bed slope less than 10%, the jump
occurs close to the trigger point.

Figure 2.17: Location of a hydraulic jump


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Chow (cited in DTMR 2010).

Length of jump

The length of a hydraulic jump is defined as the distance measured from the front face of the jump to a point
on the surface immediately downstream of the roller and is difficult to model and predict. Two methods to
determine the length of jump are presented here.

Method 1

Observation and measurements have shown that a good approximation of jump length is five times the
sequent depth (y2). In most cases, the jump length is between four and six times y2.

Method 2

The length of the jump can be determined from a relationship based on experimental data prepared by
Peterka (1964) for the US Bureau of Reclamation, as shown in Figure 2.18. This curve was developed
primarily for jumps in rectangular channels but may also be applied to approximate undular and weak jumps
formed in trapezoidal channels.

The length determined by either method should be rounded up to the nearest metre.

As the length of jump indicates the extent of turbulence, it is therefore the minimum length of channel that
should be armoured against scour/erosion. When determining the length of jumps in open channels for
armouring purposes, Method 1 is recommended as it gives a more conservative answer. Method two should
only be used when in constrained situations.

Austroads 2023 | page 29


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Application of hydraulic jumps

There are many practical applications for the hydraulic jump. The most practical of these applications, for the
purpose of road design, is its use as an energy dissipator to prevent scouring downstream of a hydraulic
structure such as a culvert or to prevent scouring in an open channel.

2.3.7 Hydraulic Drop

The converse of the hydraulic jump, the hydraulic drop, can also occur due to an abrupt change in channel
slope or cross-section. It can frequently occur near the entrance to a culvert flowing under inlet control. An
explanation of culverts flowing under inlet control is given in Section 3.8.3 – Culverts Inlet Control.

Figure 2.18: Length of hydraulic jump in terms of sequent depth (y2) in horizontal channels
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Chow (cited in DTMR 2010).

Erosive Velocities in Natural Streams

Natural streams may be part of an open channel design or subject to outlet velocities from a drainage
structure and therefore a key design consideration is ensuring that any design changes to the flow in the
natural stream do not create erosive situations in the stream.

Erosive velocities in natural stream beds are shown in Table 2.5 and have been derived from curves by Neill
(cited in DTMR 2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 30


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 2.5: Erosive velocities in natural streams

Stream bed type Velocity (m/s)


Silt less than 0.3
Sand Fine less than 0.3
Coarse less than 0.3
Gravel 6 mm 0.6 to 0.9
25 mm 1.3 to 1.5
100 mm 2.0 to 3.0
Clay Soft 0.3 to 0.6
Stiff 1.0 to 1.2
Hard 1.5 to 2.0
Rocks 150 mm 2.5 to 3.0
300 mm 3.5 to 4.0

Source: DTMR (2010)

Backwater

Backwater is the accumulation of water in a stream. For further information, see AGRD Part 5 – Section
3.8.1.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

2.5.1 Tidal Waters

Information on the impacts and design considerations of tidal waters and storm surge can be found in AGRD
Part 5 – Section 3.8.2.

2.5.2 Downstream Tributary

Information on the impacts and considerations to the water heights in downstream tributaries can be found in
AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.8.4.

Tailwater Heights

Tailwater heights refer to the normal water height, for a given flow, in a channel immediately downstream of
a drainage structure. For a proposed culvert, it is the depth of flow at the culvert outlet, measured from the
water surface in the downstream channel to the invert of the culvert and the depth can be significant.
Tailwater heights are an important control on the hydraulic performance of road drainage structures,
therefore the estimation of tailwater heights is required for all hydraulic analyses for bridges and culverts.

Typically, tailwater height is defined by the downstream channel properties. If the downstream channel and
flow is uniform, the tailwater height may be determined using Manning’s Equation (see Section 2.3.3 –
Fundamental Equations). If the downstream flow is non-uniform, or if it is being influenced by backwater, a
more sophisticated analysis by a specialist hydraulic engineer is required.

2.6.1 Tailwater Effects

As previously mentioned, tailwater is an important aspect required to determine the hydraulic operation and
performance of drainage structures.

Austroads 2023 | page 31


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

A low tailwater typically means the channel can drain the stormwater away fairly quickly and easily. This is
common where drainage channels are less defined with low banks, allowing the stormwater to spread
widely. Drainage structures with low tailwater heights will most likely be controlled by inlet conditions and can
have high outlet velocities; therefore, erosion can be an issue. A high tailwater height typically means the
channel does not drain the stormwater away quickly. This is common where drainage channels are
reasonably defined with mid-to-high banks, allowing the channel to contain most stormwater flows. Drainage
structures with high tailwater will most likely be controlled by outlet conditions and can have low outlet
velocities, therefore high headwater heights (afflux) can be an issue.

2.6.2 Design Tailwater Heights

Typically, tailwater heights should be determined based on an assessment of channel flow (and flow depths),
for a given discharge, over a significant length of undisturbed downstream channel. This assessment is
usually commenced at a point well downstream of the proposed structure and calculated back/upstream
towards the proposed structure. The assessment should also include the effects of floods and tailwater
heights. This assessment is complex and hydraulic modelling software is often used.

For the design of most drainage structures within the scope of this Guide, the survey data gathered in
relation to creeks, streams, or channels are usually limited to the road environment (constrained by property
boundaries), unless an extended downstream survey was specifically requested.

Using available survey data and assuming the channel is regular in shape and steady, uniform flow
conditions can be expected, the tailwater height can be determined using Manning’s Equation as follows
and:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• adopting a stream/channel cross-section just downstream of the proposed structure outlet, but
representative of the downstream channel in general
• using a series of calculations (Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) and Q = V x A), to develop a Stage-
Discharge curve for the channel
• using the Stage-Discharge curve and design discharge for the proposed structure, to determine flow
depth. This depth is adopted as the tailwater depth for the proposed structure analysis.

Where the design discharge exceeds the maximum capacity of the channel, the channel will overflow and
the design discharge (flow) will spread. Survey data should be reviewed to see if there are any high banks or
if the cross-section can be extended to allow for increased flow depth. Where possible the Stage-Discharge
curve may be extended to incorporate the additional waterway area. If the extended cross-section cannot
contain the design discharge and the spread of flow is significant (i.e. there would be little increase in flow
depth based on design discharge), then the tailwater height could be set at the height of maximum capacity
for the defined channel. Also, if there is not much of an outlet channel (flat terrain/low banks) and the design
discharge easily overtops the banks and/or spread of flow is significant, then a low tailwater height should be
adopted. The survey data should be used to produce a wide flat cross-section and the above process should
be followed to determine this low tailwater height.

Furthermore, anecdotal information with respect to channel flows should be sourced from local residents.
Theoretical predictions (proposed tailwater height) should be checked against the anecdotal evidence to
establish whether they reasonably agree. If so, then the level of confidence in prediction is increased. If not,
then further checks of calculations and gathered information are required. All gathered information should be
recorded.

Open Channel Design

The primary aim when designing artificial channels is the determination of a channel cross-section that will
convey the design flow whilst maintaining velocities within acceptable limits.

Austroads 2023 | page 32


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.7.1 Design Methodology

There are two artificial channel types:


• hard lined channels
• vegetated/bare-earth channels.

Each of these channel types has a specific design methodology to determine the channel cross-section and
these are detailed in the following sections.

General considerations

The following aspects should be considered/established before the design of the channel commences:
• channel velocity – velocities need to be considered for their potential for scouring the channel
• channel slope – generally, flow in channels is intermittent, and the channel must be constructed to allow
all stormwater to drain away (no ponding). Therefore, the minimum channel slope (So) should not be less
than 0.25% for a hard lined channel and not be less than 0.5% for vegetated and bare-earth channels
• if a ‘self-cleaning’ channel is required, designers should see specific water-sensitive road design
guidelines for the design requirements
• channel side slopes – slopes should be based on the stability of the material the channel is to be
constructed in (channel is shaped before any lining is applied or grass grows). Typically, this will be in the
range one in one to one in four
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• maintenance – safe access for maintenance equipment should be considered in addition to the ease of
maintenance operations based on the cross-section shape
• freeboard – the freeboard to be adopted for open channels is the greater of the following calculations (see
AGRD Part 5 – Section 4.6
– 300 mmA
– 20% of the flow depth
– velocity headB of the flow.

Note:
– A: Where flooding of adjacent land and buildings does not represent a risk, the 300 mm requirement
can be reduced to 150 mm.
– B: See Section 2.3.5 – Energy Principles.

Hard lined channels

With hard lined or rigid boundary channels, the design procedure is relatively simple as potentially erosive
velocities are less important. Therefore, the cost of excavation and lining are primary factors in determining
the geometry of the channel.

Research and experimentation has found that the most efficient, hydraulic section is when the wetted
perimeter (P) is minimised for a given cross-sectional area (A). Typically, in open channels, this occurs when
the width of flow is twice the depth of flow. Therefore, the shape of channel that gives the best hydraulic
efficiency (also known as best hydraulic section) occurs when the hydraulic radius is shown by Equation 14:

Austroads 2023 | page 33


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

𝑦 14
𝑅 = ⁄2

Based on this requirement, the most efficient shape is a semi-circle as it has the least wetted perimeter for a
given area – R is always equal to y/2 irrespective of dimensions. However the cost and difficulty of building in
situ semi-circular channels prohibits their widespread use. Trapezoidal channels are more commonplace.
The most efficient trapezoidal shape is the half-hexagon.

For the design of hard lined channels:

Determine design discharge (Q), bed slope (So), Manning’s n value and channel side slope (X) (Figure 2.19).

Figure 2.19: Trapezoidal channel section


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

For best hydraulic section, use Equation 15:

𝑏𝑦 + 𝑋𝑦 2 𝑦 15
𝑅= =
2 √𝑦 2 + (𝑋𝑦)2 + 𝑏 2

and resolve for b as a function of y.

Combining Equation 1, Manning’s Equation (Equation 3), and Equation 17 gives Equation 16:

2⁄ 1⁄ 16
2
𝐴𝑅 3 𝑆𝑓
𝑄=
𝑛
where

𝐴 = 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑋𝑦 2 17

𝑅 = y/2 (Equation 14)

𝑆𝑓 = Friction slope (𝑆𝑜 is used to approximate 𝑆𝑓 )

𝑛 = Manning’s 𝑛 value

Substitute b with function for b (derived from Equation 15) and solve for y.

Calculate b by substituting y into the function for b.

Channel geometry can now be determined, and freeboard added.

Calculate the Froude Number for the channel section/flow and together with velocity and depth of flow; check
that conditions are acceptable where the designed channel discharges into an existing channel.

Austroads 2023 | page 34


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

A worked example of this method is shown in Section 2.16.4 – Example 4: Manning’s Equation.

Vegetated or bare-earth channels

Vegetated/bare-earth channels are erodible boundary channels and the design procedure is relatively
simple, as it is based on the method of maximum permissible velocity.

This method assumes that the channel will remain stable provided that the average velocity of the design
flow is below a determined threshold value.

A key concern for vegetated channels is the consequence when the grass cover cannot be maintained, such
as during drought or after a bushfire. If there is a reasonable risk of this occurring and channel scour is likely
and not desirable, the design should be undertaken assuming bare-earth design values.

When designing vegetated/bare-earth channels the following must be considered:


• the material in which the channel is to be constructed
• a suitable grass species for the channel (where applicable)
• an appropriate Manning’s n value.

A suitable grass species for a stormwater channel should have a relatively short blade
(< 50 mm) and be:
• quick to establish
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• self-repairing
• able to survive short durations of inundation
• able to withstand proposed design velocities
• native to the area.

The species should be chosen in consultation with a suitably qualified landscape architect or horticulturalist.
The reason for choosing a short blade length grass species is primarily that longer blade length species can
reduce flow velocity by increased flow resistance. This increases flow depth (surcharge) and ultimately can
cause the channel to break its banks. Swale drains are special vegetated channels, where the flow velocity is
lowered to maximise stormwater treatment. In swale drains, it is common for the flow depth to be less than
the height of grass and care is required when selecting the Manning’s n, see Section 2.8 – Grassed
Channels.

Channels could also have a Water Sensitive Road Design (WSRD) function, so a longer grass blade length
may be preferred.

Table 2.6: 6 gives recommended maximum velocities for use in the design of consolidated, bare-earth
channels and vegetated channels.

Austroads 2023 | page 35


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 2.6: Recommended maximum velocities (design) for consolidated, bare channels and vegetated
channels

Permissible velocities (m/s) when fraction of stable surface cover (1) is:
Channel gradient (%)
0.02 0.5 0.7 1.0

Erosion resistant soils (e.g. krasnozems and red earths)


0.5 0.8 1.8 2.4 2.8
1 0.7 1.6 2.1 2.8
2 0.6 1.4 1.8 2.5
3 0.5 1.3 1.7 2.4
4 1.3 1.6 2.3
5 1.2 1.6 2.2
6 1.5 2.1
8 1.5 2.0
10 1.4 1.9
15 1.3 1.8
20 1.3 1.7

Easily eroded soils (e.g. black earths and fine surface texture – contrast soils)
0.5 0.6 1.3 1.6 2.3
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

1 0.5 1.2 1.5 2.1


2 0.5 1.1 1.4 1.9
3 0.4 1.0 1.3 1.8
4 1.0 1.2 1.7
5 0.9 1.2 1.6
6 1.1 1.6
8 1.1 1.5
10 1.1 1.5
15 1.0 1.4
20 0.9 1.3
1 Applies to surface consolidated, but not cultivated.
Notes: Assume the following species under average conditions will provide the fraction of cover indicated:
• Kikuyu, pangola and well maintained couch species – 1.0.
• Rhodes grass, and poorly maintained couch species – 0.7.
• Native species, tussock grasses – 0.5.
Source: Adapted from Department of Environment and Resource Management (2012).

The following method should be used for the design of vegetated/bare-earth channels:
1. Determine design discharge (Q), bed slope (So), Manning’s n value, channel side slope (X) (see
Figure 2.19) and the maximum recommended velocity (Vmax) from Table 2.6: . For bare-earth channel
design, adopt 0% cover.
2. Using the basic equation Q=V x A, determine required waterway area.

𝑄
𝐴 = ⁄𝑉
𝑚𝑎𝑥

3. Combining Equation 1 and Manning’s Equation (shown in Equation 16):

Austroads 2023 | page 36


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2⁄ 1⁄
2
𝐴𝑅 3 𝑆𝑜
𝑄=
𝑛

Re-arrange and solve for wetted perimeter (P):


3⁄
5⁄ 1⁄ 2
2
𝐴 3 𝑆𝑜
𝑃= ( )
𝑄𝑛

a. Based on channel geometry, two expressions for A and P exist:

𝐴 = (𝑏 + 𝑦𝑋)𝑦 (from Equation 17)

and (from part of Equation 15):

𝑃 = 2𝑦 √𝑋 2 + 1 + 𝑏

Re-arrange expression for A to isolate b:

𝐴
𝑏= − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

and substitute back into expression for P:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝐴
𝑃 = 2𝑦√𝑋 2 + 1 + − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

b. Calculate depth of flow (y). Solving for y requires rearrangement into the form of a quadratic equation.

𝑎 𝑦 2 + 𝑏𝑦 + 𝑐 = 0

The general solution of a quadratic equation is Equation 18:

−𝑏 ± √𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐 18
𝑦=
2𝑎

solving a quadratic equation gives 2 roots. Substitute roots (y) into:

𝐴
𝑏= − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

and solve for b. Dismiss any negative solution and adopt the positive (real) solution for y.
c. Channel geometry can now be determined with freeboard added.

If there are no real roots to the equation, this means that the velocity will never reach the maximum
permissible velocity for the given discharge (Q) and roughness (n), regardless of channel dimensions. In
this case, use the ‘best hydraulic section’ design methodology as detailed in the Section 2.7.1 – Design
Methodology, for the design of the vegetated channel. However, also check that the average velocity of
the resultant channel section does not exceed the maximum recommended velocity (see Table 2.6: 6).
d. Calculate the Froude Number for the channel section/flow and together with velocity and depth of flow;
check that conditions are acceptable where the designed channel discharges into an existing channel.

A worked example of this method is shown in Section 2.16.5 – Example 5: Vegetated/Erodible


Boundary Channel Design.

Austroads 2023 | page 37


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.7.2 Channel Transitions

Changes from one channel cross-section to another should be smoothly transitioned as energy losses occur
with the changes.

It is recommended that maximum contraction rates of about one on one, and maximum expansion rates of
about 1 on 4 be adopted as shown in Figure 2.20.

Figure 2.20: Maximum rates of contraction and expansion

Source: DTMR (2010).

Transition head losses can be calculated using Equation 19:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝑉12 𝑉22 19
ℎ𝑡 = 𝐶𝑢 ( − )
2𝑔 2𝑔

where

ℎ𝑡 = Transition head loss (m)

𝐶𝑢 = Transition energy loss coefficient (dimensionless)

𝑉1 = Average flow velocity upstream of transition (m/s)

𝑉2 = Average flow velocity downstream of transition (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

Transition energy loss (contraction and expansion) coefficients (Cu) are shown in Table 2.7: 7 for use in this
formula. Types of transition are shown in Figure 2.21.

It should be noted that the more abrupt the transition, the greater the energy loss.

The difference in velocity head is always to be taken as positive even if mathematically it is negative. In other
words, a change in section will always give a head loss.

Table 2.7: Channel transition energy loss coefficients

Transition type Contraction Expansion


(Ref Figure 2.21) coefficient Cu coefficient Cu
Warped 0.10 0.20
Cylindrical quadrant 0.15 0.25
Wedge 0.30 0.50
Straight line 0.30 0.50

Austroads 2023 | page 38


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Square end 0.30 0.75


Source: Thompson and Kilgore (2006).

Figure 2.21: Channel transition types

Source: Thompson and Kilgore (2006).

2.7.3 Energy Losses in Channel Bends


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The Department of Natural Resources and Water, Queensland, DNRW (2007), based on work by Mockmore,
gives an equation to calculate the loss in a bend in an open channel. Equation 20, the equation for channel
bend head loss for bends with changes in direction between 90 to 180 degrees, is:

2𝑏 𝑉 2 20
ℎ𝑏 = ( )( )
𝑅𝑐 2𝑔

where

ℎ𝑏 = Channel bend head loss (m)

𝑏 = Channel width (m)

𝑉 = Average flow velocity (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

𝑅𝑐 = Centreline radius of bend (m)

Results from using this equation should be considered as providing a conservative estimate of head loss.
Linear interpolation is recommended for bends between 0° and 90°.

2.7.4 Superelevation in Channel Bends

Water flowing around a bend in an open channel may show a superelevation with a rise in water height on
the outside of the bend and a corresponding dip in water heights on the inside of the bend. The maximum
difference in these water heights is termed the superelevation (not to be confused with the percentage
superelevation in geometric road design).

Austroads 2023 | page 39


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The superelevation should be considered when a flood height is reported at a bend (the exact location
needing to be defined), or where it is essential that the design flow does not exit from a man-made channel
at the outside edge of a bend.

Superelevation can be estimated using Equation 21:

𝑅𝑜 𝑉2 21
ℎ𝑠𝑢𝑝 = 2 log 𝑒 ( )( )
𝑅𝑖 2𝑔

where

ℎ𝑠𝑢𝑝 = Superelevation of the water surface across the channel (height difference) (m)

𝑉 = Average flow velocity (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

𝑅𝑜 = Outside radius of bend (m)

𝑅𝑖 = Inner radius of bend


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Grassed Channels

This section provides the guidelines for channels that will use grass as a protective lining. Designers should
see specialists for further guidelines when an open channel (such as a swale) is to also be used for
environmental reasons (e.g. Water Sensitive Road Design).

2.8.1 Normal Grassed Channels

The cross-section shapes generally used for grassed channels are trapezoidal (most common), parabolic, or
triangular. Flat side slopes should be used where space permits to assist in minimising maintenance costs. A
desirable maximum steepness of 1:6 and an absolute maximum steepness of 1:4 should be used for the
design of the side slopes.

The maximum permissible velocity of flow in a grass channel is the velocity which, if maintained for a
reasonable length of time, will not cause erosion. Recommended velocities for different vegetal covers,
channel slopes, and soil conditions are given in Table 2.6: 6.

The minimum non-silting velocity is uncertain. However, as a general rule the channel velocity should not fall
below 0.5 m/s.

To function well, grassed channels normally have longitudinal slopes of 0.2% to 0.6%. Where natural
topography is steeper than the desired slope of the channel, channel drops (see Section 2.10 – Channel
Drops) or drop structures should be considered.

Sharp curves which affect the flow in the channel should not be used. In general, curves should be such that
the minimum radius at the centre line is equal to about three times the width of the top of the design flow.

Research by the United States Soil Conservation Service (USSCS) has found that, for a particular channel
lined with a certain species of grass that has a definite length, the value of n varies with the product of the
mean velocity of flow V (m/s) and the hydraulic radius R (m). The relationship is a characteristic of the
vegetation and is the same for most common sections used.

Austroads 2023 | page 40


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The vegetation characteristics were defined by five degrees of retardance (A to E) depending on the grass
species and length. A channel lined with a grass having a high retardance (A), such as 750 mm long Rhodes
grass, has its flow severely restricted by the grass, while any grass less than 50 mm long, having a low
retardance (E), has little effect on the flow. The relationship between grass species, length and retardance is
given in Table 2.3: 3.

The original USSCS curves for degree of retardance D and E have been replaced in this Guide by curves
based on work by Kouwen et al. (1981) who found that the original curves were not acceptable for short, stiff
vegetation on slopes smaller than 5%.

The use of erosion control cut-off walls at regular intervals in a grassed channel is desirable. Such cut-off
walls will safeguard a channel from serious erosion prior to the grass becoming established or immediately
after a fire. These walls are usually of unreinforced concrete or rock masonry, approximately 200 mm wide
and from 450 mm to 600 mm deep, extending across the entire bed of the channel and conforming to its
shape. Where the banks of the channel may erode, these walls should extend up the banks to the design
water surface.

The designer needs to consider the impact of these walls on the conveyance of the channel and hence flood
heights.

2.8.2 Reinforced Grassed Channels

The use of reinforced grass (or turf) in channel design provides the benefits of significantly increased
allowable flow velocities, however, these products also come with disadvantages, including:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• possible public safety problems resulting from high flow velocities


• maintenance personnel may not be aware of the existence of the grass reinforcing and normal grading
operations can result in costly damage to the reinforcing mats
• damage by grass fires
• degradation of habitat of ground-dwelling wildlife in a bushland environment
• die-off of grass owing to high sediment deposition (reinforced grass or turf can only be installed once the
contributing catchment is stable)
• loss of topsoil in the future when the channel is removed, rebuilt, reconditioned or relocated as it is likely
that the reinforced grass and its enclosed topsoil will need to be removed from the site, thus preventing
the reuse of the topsoil.

The latter point can be a major concern in areas where there is limited topsoil.

There are several proprietary types of reinforced grass which are termed ‘a form of geotextile protection’ in
the U.S.A. Some tests of relatively small flows indicate resistance to erosion for flows up to 5 m/s. Caution
should be exercised before adopting design velocities of this magnitude; the duration and depths of flow on
the actual job site will also need to be considered.

The reinforced grass may be considered an intermediate type of lining between conventional grass and
hard/impermeable linings. Values of Manning’s n for these linings can be found in 2.1.

The following provides a comparison on n values for different channel treatments:


• from Table 2.1 – Section 3 – Culverts (b) (ii) n value range 0.025 – 0.030 say use n = 0.028 for
conventional grass
• from Table 2.1 – Section 2 – Open Channels (a) n = 0.012 for hard/impermeable
• average for reinforced grass n = 0.020.

Austroads 2023 | page 41


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Channels Lined with Hard Facings

2.9.1 General

These channels are typically lined with concrete, riprap or rock mattresses/gabions and are highly resistant
to erosion. Design velocities may be as high as 5 m/s, much higher than those for grassed channels.

Smaller cross-sections than those for grassed channels are possible to take the same discharges, as side
slopes of 1:1 are practical, although it is common to use 1:1.5. Channels with hard facings should be
considered where the width is limited within the road environment. If the channel is located within the clear
zone of the road, the designer should see AGRD Part 6 (Austroads 2022), for guidance on appropriate
treatments for errant vehicles.

Other considerations for channels with hard faced linings include the provision of:
• contraction and expansion joints to minimise the risk of cracking and seepage and potential undermining
• step irons (or similar device), to enable safe access, where the channel side slope is steeper than 1:2 and
the channel depth exceeds 0.9 m
• pressure relief weepholes in impermeable linings both within the channel invert and within the channel
side slopes. Weep holes should be 90 mm diameter at 1.8 m maximum centres (depends on detailed
structural design requirements)
• lateral protection against surface flows undermining the side slopes. A hard faced strip having a minimum
width of 0.45 m on both sides at the top of the channel is recommended
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• cut-off walls at the ends of the bed and side linings. These should have a minimum depth of 0.5 m
• possible requirements for an energy dissipator at the end of the lined channel section to manage the
expected high flow velocities.

2.9.2 Riprap and Rock Filled Wire Mattresses/Gabions

Riprap is a conventional protection used to prevent channel bed and bank damage upstream and
downstream of hydraulic structures, at bends, at bridges and in other channel areas where there is potential
for erosion.

The thickness of the riprap should be not less than 1.5 times the largest diameter of rock. Figure 2.22 shows
the relationship between bed velocity and rock diameter (Kouwen et al. 1981). When using Figure 2.22, bed
velocity can be taken as approximately 0.7 times the average channel velocity. The designer also needs to
determine the velocity on the bank side slopes, particularly on bends, as this is critical for the stability of the
side slopes.

The flow velocity on side slopes depends on the side slope angle but typically the shear stress is slightly less
on the side slope than that on the channel base. The flow velocity in bends is dependent on the radius of the
bend, the tighter the radius the higher the flow velocity. It is common for the side slope face flow velocity
(parallel to the channel invert) in a tight bend to be 1.3 to 1.5 times the bottom flow velocity in a straight
channel. In channels that can be expected to experience high debris loads, the designer also needs to
consider the mechanical prying force effects that could be generated by say a tree branch on the rock riprap.
Special care is also required for rock riprap design where there is a significant component of flow down the
face of the side slope (perpendicular to the channel invert), see Section 4.6.2 – Floodway Crossings with
other than Grassed Batters and the Types 4 and 5 floodway protection (Sections 4.7.6 and 4.7.7). For these
special cases the designer should seek the advice of a specialist in the design of rock riprap protection
works.

Austroads 2023 | page 42


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Rock filled wire mattresses or gabions may also be used to line the channel bank or bed, as shown in
Figure 2.23. Smaller sized rocks can be used, because the wire basket surrounding the rock in the mattress,
or gabion, tends to make the mass act as a unit while retaining flexibility. Besides providing protection
against scour, rock filled gabions are useful as drops with either vertical or stepped faces. At drops, the
gabions should be keyed into both banks, and a downstream cut-off wall should be considered. Design and
construction of gabion protection should be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations/specifications.

Figure 2.22: Relationship between bed velocity and rock diameter


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 43


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.23: Channel lined with rock filled wire mattresses

Source: DTMR (2010).

Open channel lined with riprap


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

When using riprap or rock filled wire mattresses over erodible underlying materials an appropriate geotextile
fabric should be placed under and behind the riprap, rock filled wire mattresses, or gabions to prevent
erosion and water piping through the lining treatment.

Some of the in-service problems associated with rock filled wire mattresses and gabions are listed below:
• Vegetation problems: In some locations, rock filled wire baskets have been known to quickly vegetate
with both native and non-native weeds and vines. These vines can then migrate into the surrounding
bushland causing problems to native trees.
• Erosion: When used on the outside of channel bends, rock filled mattresses and gabions effectively form
a ‘hydraulically’ smooth surface. This ‘smooth’ surface causes high flow velocities to occur immediately
adjacent to the wire baskets. These high flow velocities can then result in increased bed erosion at the
base of the gabion wall (causing foundation problems), or bank erosion immediately downstream of the
gabion protected bank.
• Vegetation cover: In some installations long-term stability is best achieved by having the gabion and
mattress structures covered with vegetation. When this form of bank stabilisation is placed under a wide-
span bridge, light and rainfall restrictions can limit or prevent vegetation cover, thus resulting in a
reduction of the expected life span of the structure.
• Damage by sediment: In channels that transport large quantities of coarse bed-load sediment, the
expected design life of gabion and rock mattress structures can be reduced due to damage to both the
plastic and galvanised wire coatings.

Site specific designs need to be completed for every gabion or mattress application using design
recommendations from the suppliers of proprietary products.

2.9.3 Concrete Lined Channels

Concrete linings must be protected from hydrostatic uplift forces which can be created by a high water table
after the flow in the channel has dropped. A free draining perforated subsoil drainage pipe may be required
in large channels. In small channels, weepholes and porous backfill may be adequate.

Austroads 2023 | page 44


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Where undermining along the top of the lining is a risk, a cut-off lip or wall should be provided. In long
lengths of lining, expansion joints are required.

Care should be taken in the design of channels required to carry supercritical flow to ensure that:
• Curves are avoided if possible.
• Channels are free of obstructions which may cause oscillatory waves to extend down the remaining
length of the channels and into culverts.
• Pipes entering a channel are cut off flush with the lining.
• Expansion joints are dowelled to prevent differential movement between segments of the lining, which
could otherwise allow high velocity flow to enter the joints and cause uplift.
• Unintended hydraulic jumps do not form.

Channels designed for supercritical flow require a smooth surface which is provided by concrete lining. The
thickness of lining and type of reinforcement required should be determined in consultation with the road
agency or a specialist structural engineer.

Where channels are large enough, they should generally be accessible to vehicles for maintenance in which
case the lining of the base of the channel should be designed for the appropriate vehicular loading and soil
conditions.

Channel Drops
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The use of channel drops, waterfalls or scour checks may permit flatter channel slopes to be employed. For
safety reasons, it is generally desirable to use several low-head drops rather than fewer higher drops.
However, it is often more difficult to control the hydraulics of low drops.

While vertical drops should generally be avoided to minimise safety concerns and erosion control problems,
they may have to be used in some circumstances. Also, depending on tailwater conditions, supercritical flow
often occurs on the apron of the drop and as a result, either a hydraulic jump or submerged jet will usually
form downstream.

The use and design of channel drops should be referred to a specialist hydraulic engineer.

2.10.1 Check Dams

Another method to reduce the velocity of water flowing in a channel is the use of check dams placed across
the channel. A check dam is constructed across the channel, using a permeable material, such as rocks, to
reduce the velocity of the water. They allow the water to flow through the structure but at a slower rate than
the flow in the channel.

Baffle Chutes

Baffle chutes (Figure 2.24) provide a satisfactory method of dissipating the energy of flow in a channel where
the slope is steep and to be effective they require no tailwater. The use and design of baffle chutes should
be referred to a specialist hydraulic engineer.

Austroads 2023 | page 45


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.24: Diagram of a baffle chute


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Edge Drains and Median Drains

2.12.1 Design of Edge and Median Drainage

General

It is preferable to allow the pavement run-off to discharge across the shoulder and into the channel but
where the batter slope is steep due to restricted width and erosion of the slope is likely, a kerb should be
provided. However, on high-speed carriageways, kerbs or steep batter slopes should be avoided for safety
reasons.

The main limitation on median drains relates to safe slopes for errant vehicles. Median drains are usually flat
bottomed and 2.0 m to 2.5 m wide at the bottom to accommodate maintenance machinery. For very wide
medians it is desirable from a road safety perspective to have batter slopes of about 1:10 (to cater for trucks)
and grated pits and underground pipes. See AGRD Part 6 (Austroads 2022) for guidance on driveable batter
slopes and safety barriers.

However, the side slope of 1:10 or flatter severely restricts the capacity of such drains unless the median is
very wide. It may therefore be necessary in many instances to provide a steeper batter slope up to 1:6
(satisfactory for cars) or greater in which case a safety barrier may be required. Reference should be made
to AGRD Part 6 (Austroads 2022) for guidance on driveable batter slopes and safety barriers.

Pavement run-off

The maximum velocities allowed in grass channels so as to prevent erosion are given in Table 2.6: and the
minimum velocity to prevent silting as a general rule should not fall below 0.5 m/s.

Austroads 2023 | page 46


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Channel treatment

Where a grassed channel is the preferred treatment, the channel must have sufficient hydraulic capacity to
prevent spread of the water onto the through traffic lanes of the pavement. Also, the bottom of the channel
should desirably be at a lower elevation than the pavement sub base in cuts, otherwise subsoil drains may
be necessary to protect the pavement from excessive moisture. Grassed channels are further discussed in
Section 2.8 – Grassed Channels.

In very narrow and steep medians, concrete drains may be necessary to provide sufficient capacity. The
hydraulic design of concrete drains is outlined in Section 2.9.3 – Channels Lined with Hard Facings.

In very restricted areas, special drainage inlets and conduits may have to be provided.

Inlets

The inlets used to intercept flow in the median should desirably be set flush with the ground so as not to be
hazardous to mowing equipment and vehicles that run off the road. The bars of the grated pits should be set
parallel to the flow to improve hydraulic efficiency. A concrete apron should be used around the inlet to
accelerate the flow into it and to prevent the grate from being overgrown by vegetation.

If a slightly raised grated inlet with the top above the natural surface is adopted to minimise debris collection,
concrete aprons should still be provided to improve conspicuity of the grate for maintenance personnel
undertaking mowing.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Complete interception of all median flow at each inlet gives the most efficient design. For drains on grades, a
levee across the median just downstream of the inlet creates a sag condition and ensures complete
interception (see Figure 2.25).

The levee should be of just sufficient height to maintain the design head over the grate and have slopes of
1:6 or flatter (1:20 is desirable) for the safety of out-of-control vehicles. The height of the levee is usually that
of the 10 year average recurrence interval (ARI) flood. Furthermore, designers need to also ensure that any
overtopping of the levee will not force stormwater onto the road surface. Where this cannot be achieved, the
road geometrics may need to be reviewed and modified.

The design procedure for inlets is given in Section 2.15 – Catch Drains and Catch Banks. The allowable
depth of ponding is determined as the depth to contain the flow within the median.

Austroads 2023 | page 47


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.25: Median inlets with levees


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 48


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table Drains and Table Drain Blocks

An important design consideration may arise, where new table drains join existing table drains. The impacts
of discharge from the additional flow into the existing drain must be considered in the design of the new
drain. The shape and grade of adjoining table drains should also match. Where the shape and grade do not
match, a suitable transition or other mitigating treatment must be designed to ensure that scour does not
occur and/or that stormwater does not flow out onto the road surface.

2.13.1 Table Drains

Table drains (Figure 2.26) are located along the outer edge of the shoulder in cuts, and beside shallow
raised carriageways on fill. They collect water from the pavement, shoulders and cut batters and convey it to
a suitable turnout, watercourse or culvert. See AGRD Part 3 (Austroads 2016) for details concerning their
location and use of table drains in road design.

Flat-bottomed table drains are the preferred type or shape, the bottom being wide enough to accommodate
maintenance machinery. Figure 2.27 shows the general location and shape details. The base of the drain is
not flat as the name suggests but is to be sloped away from the carriageway (at least 3%). These drains:
• spread the flow, reducing depth and velocity (reduced scour potential)
• keep flow and any ponding away from the embankment
• allow easier access for maintenance
• allow safer passage through the drain for errant vehicles
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• may provide a source of borrow material for some projects.

Figure 2.26: Typical table drains

The use of ‘V’ drains is to be limited and generally confined to situations where the width available for a drain
is constrained.

Determination of depth and velocity of flow within the table drain can be undertaken by combining Equation 1
and Manning’s Equation (shown in Equation 16).

Austroads 2023 | page 49


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.27: Table drain location and shape

Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Side slopes should not exceed 6:1. Where this slope cannot be achieved designers should see AGRD Part 6
(Austroads 2022), for guidance on drain profiles that are not hazardous to errant vehicles or guidance on the
need for a safety barrier.

The design water height in the drain should desirably be set below the subgrade height of the road
pavement, particularly in flat country or in high water conditions. It is desirable that the table drain is
designed to limit pavement saturation and scour, and that the water depth limits the encroachment of water
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

onto the shoulder and carriageway.

Where the material between the table drain and the road pavement is impermeable, the table drain may flow
up to a height which provides 150 mm freeboard against overtopping, or 150 mm below the height of the
outer edge of the shoulder, provided that this does not flood subsurface drain outlets.

The invert of the table drain should be at least 150 mm below the bottom of the pavement (i.e. below
subgrade height), and deeper where subsurface drains discharge into the table drain. The depth of the table
drain will depend upon the design capacity required to safely convey the storm water and the depth of the
subsurface drain outlet.

The slope of grassed table drains (channels) depends on the terrain and the type of soil. The minimum
design slope should be such that ponding, and siltation is avoided, and the maximum slope should be
selected to avoid soil erosion. However, this balance is often difficult to achieve in practice as most table
drains are graded to follow road grade lines and often do not achieve the most desirable slope.
Nevertheless, the following general guide is provided to assist road designers’ understanding of desirable
slopes:
• To avoid ponding and siltation the desirable minimum slope should be in the range 0.4% to 0.5%.
• To avoid erosion the slope should not exceed 0.6%, depending on the soil.
• Drains steeper than 1% may need scour protection, depending on the erodibility of the soil (see AGRD
Part 5 – Section 3.6) and the vegetative cover.
• A slope of 0.2% may be necessary in very flat terrain.
• A slope of 0.3% may be regarded as the minimum practical slope for construction.

It is important to understand that the slope of the table drain is tied to the grade of the road and therefore,
there are situations where the slope of the table drain is less than the minimum. Examples of this are about
the apex of a crest vertical curve and on flat grades. In these situations, the table drain will have to be
graded independent of the road control line in order to achieve minimum slope.

Austroads 2023 | page 50


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Where a table drain has been widened as a source of borrow material, it should be graded to a suitable
outlet so that water does not pond against the road formation and weaken the subgrade (Underwood 1995).

Table drains can also function as swales, and this requires that they also conform to the principles outlined in
AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.5.

Extreme care is required in the design of drains in very erodible soils or soils with highly dispersive subsoils,
as exposure of such material can have disastrous consequences. Where scour is likely because of the
nature of the material or because of the longitudinal grading, some type of protection of the drain invert is
required. This protection could take the form of rock lining or concrete. In areas known to have dispersive
subsoil, soil chemistry should be analysed to determine whether soil properties can be economically
improved to aid soil stability. The terminal treatment at the bottom of a steep table drain is also important in
order to dissipate the energy of the stormwater.

2.13.2 Table Drain Blocks

On vertical grades (excluding sags), cross drainage culverts can be used to take table drain flow from the
upstream side of the road formation to the downstream side. In order for these culverts (generally of small
diameter) to operate satisfactorily, sufficient head must be generated.

Table drain blocks are small earth embankments (typically 1 m in length) located within the table drain just
downstream of a culvert inlet. These blocks ‘dam’ and divert the flow into the culvert inlet. The design height
of the block should theoretically coincide with the depth of headwater required for efficient operation of the
culvert; however the design height should be no higher than where the subgrade meets the side slope.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Designers also need to ensure that any overtopping of the drain block will not force stormwater onto the road
surface. In determining the location and shape of the table drain block, there is a need to ensure that the
drain block does not create a safety hazard for errant vehicles.

The use of a table drain block for a particular culvert must be specified on the drainage drawings along with
its design height.

A marker post should be placed on or adjacent to table drain blocks to alert maintenance personnel of their
existence.

Designers of widening or overlay/rehabilitation projects should check previous project documents for use of
table drain blocks in order to check or preserve the operation of the existing culverts.

2.13.3 Diversion Drains and Diversion Blocks

Diversion drains

On vertical grades, the depth and velocity of flow within a table drain can exceed acceptable limits if no relief
mechanism is included in the design. The steeper the grade, the quicker the limits are reached.

Diversion drains may be required, at intervals based on the grade of the road, to ‘turn’ the stormwater out of
the table drain and away from the road. On the upstream side of the road, the diversion drain could either
discharge flow into a catch drain located roughly parallel to the road and generally near the boundary (drain
discharges into a culvert located further down the slope) or onto the natural surface. On the downstream side
of the road, the diversion drain would normally discharge onto the natural surface, allowing the stormwater to
naturally flow away from the road.

Austroads 2023 | page 51


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Normally, the shape of the diversion drains should match that of the table drain, however where ‘V’ shaped
table drains are used, flat-bottomed diversion drains should be used unless conflicting requirements exist
that limit the width of the formed road such as:
• minimising disturbance or loss of existing roadside trees
• reducing earthworks costs.

The channel of the diversion drain should have an excavated cross-sectional area at least equal to that of
the table drain discharging water into it. Outlets should discharge onto grassed areas rather than onto
exposed soil.

Diversion blocks

Diversion blocks are earth embankments that are located along the downstream side of diversion drains and
divert stormwater flow from the table drain into the diversion drain. The block extends from the road
formation for several metres along the side of the diversion drain.

The height of the block typically starts (against the road formation) at subgrade height and should taper
down to closely match the natural surface at the end of the block.

Diversion drains and blocks are typically constructed at a 30° to 45° angle to the road however this can be
adjusted in order to reduce the slope within the diversion drain.

The initial grade (‘turnout’ grade) in the diversion drain should approximate the grade of the table drain to
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

avoid energy loss, and hence siltation and possible bank failure. As the drain increases in length, the grade
in the drain should progressively decrease. Where the diversion drain discharges onto the natural surface,
the last half of the diversion drain’s length should ideally have a surveyed grade of 0.2% to slow the flow
velocity.

Typical spacing of diversion drains along the grade is:


• 120 m for slopes up to 2%
• 60 m for slopes from 2% to 4%
• 30 m for slopes from 4% to 8%
• 15 m for slopes greater than 8%.

If the diversion channel is built through or under a fence (with the landholder’s written agreement/approval), it
is essential that landholders ensure that the outlet is kept clear to allow free draining of the drain and that
maintenance crews are allowed easy access via an adjacent gate. Depending on the fence type and
configuration, the impact of the fence on channel flows will need to be considered.

Discharge from a diversion channel may also be spread over a pasture to assist grass growth.

In areas with known dispersive subsoils, diversion banks (that extend from the diversion block) are preferred
over excavated diversion drains.

Where new and previous projects join, designers should appropriately consider the use and effects of
diversion drains and blocks.

Austroads 2023 | page 52


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Batter Drains and Chutes

Batter drains or chutes are structures that are designed to convey run-off from the tops of embankments
down the slope of a cut or fill batter and discharge to the natural ground surface or channel at either non-
erosive velocities or onto a non-erodible surface. Occasionally, in steep country they may be used to convey
run-off from the tops of cuttings down the batter to the roadway table drain or piped drainage system. For an
example of a batter drain see Figure 2.3.

Batter drains can be permanent or temporary. Temporary batter drains are used during the construction
period to control water flow and to protect mulched or newly seeded batters from the erosive forces of
concentrated flow.

On traversable batter slopes, the permanent batter drain or chute should be shaped to a channel which is
traversable by a vehicle.

Care needs to be taken, if batter drains and chutes are proposed in highly dispersive or erodible soils, as
their use is not generally desirable for these conditions.

A major problem with this type of drain is that of the flow overtopping or running parallel to the channel and
eroding the surrounding soil. The problem is prevalent with slope drains constructed from half-round metal or
concrete pipes, pre-cast concrete units or cast-in-situ concrete channels. This situation may be aggravated
by poor installation or by not providing sufficient slope drains, or not satisfactorily locating them, to cater for
the predicted flow. It is preferable to use rock mattresses, as they encourage a wider, less concentrated flow,
are flexible enough to settle and allow water to enter the channel from the side.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The slope drains used on embankments may be constructed progressively as the height increases. Care
should be taken to ensure the efficient collection of water at the top of the batter. It may be desirable to have
the slope drains more closely spaced during construction to minimise the size of flows.

The inlet to the slope drain should ensure that all the run-off is collected and should not allow water to flow
down the slope adjacent to the channel. The bottom of the drain should have some type of energy
dissipating, or erosion control device to prevent scouring at the base of the batter. The opposite bank of the
drain at the bottom of the batter drain or chute should also provide an erosion control device to protect the
bank and turn the flow, if required.

2.14.1 Design Procedures – Batter Drains

A four-step process is provided for the design of batter drains:

Step 1 – Dimensions

Batter drains should have a minimum depth of 300 mm.

Hydraulic capacity of a batter drain is normally defined by the allowable head water height upstream of the
drain’s inlet.

Step 2 – Foundations

The lining of the batter drain should be adequately anchored to the foundations to avoid slippage or
separation, with a maximum distance of 3 m between anchorage points.

In cases where prefabricated units need to be bolted together, it is important that all bolt holes are sealed
with a flexible sealant to allow for flexural movement.

Austroads 2023 | page 53


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 3 – Inlet design

The inlet area should be protected against possible scour resulting from accelerating flow velocities (usually
more important on temporary batter drains). This protection is necessary to prevent water from either
undermining the top of the batter drain or being diverted along the edge of the lining (the most common
cause of failure).

For temporary batter drains (i.e. drainage chutes) and during the early revegetation stage of permanent
batter drains, sand or gravel bags can be used to direct inflow towards the centre of the chute.

Step 4 – Outlet design

Typically, an energy dissipator will be required.

The outlet may consist of a bed of nominal 150 mm rock (minimum) placed with a minimum bed thickness of
250 mm or at least 1.5 times the maximum rock size. Typical dimensions of the rock bed are:

L = 6De metres long (minimum)

T + 0.6 metres wide at the batter drain outlet, expanding to T + 0.5L + 0.3 metres
W =
at the end of the dissipator.

where
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

De = equivalent pipe diameter (m) of the batter drain flow area

T = top width (m) of flow in the batter drain

Batter drains should be lined each side with a minimum 300 mm wide (turf) grassed filter strip or rock to
control side erosion caused by splash. In areas where the total disturbance is to be minimised, or where
introducing turf is undesirable, other forms of erosion control such as geotextiles or concrete may be
preferred.

Catch Drains and Catch Banks

2.15.1 Catch Drains

Catch drains (also known as cut-off drains in some jurisdictions) and catch banks are separate devices, but
can be used together. They are generally located on the high side of cuttings clear of the top of batters to
intercept the flow of surface water and upper soil seepage water (Figure 2.28). Their purpose is to prevent
overloading of the table drain and drilling and erosion or scour of the batter face.

Catch drains and/or catch banks can also protect embankments, disturbed areas and stockpile sites from
surface water. Alternatively, catch drains placed at the bottom of fill slopes intercept water from adjacent
properties as well as convey road drainage to an outlet.

These devices are generally located no closer than 2.0 m from the edge of the cuttings in order to minimise
possible undercutting of the top of the batter.

The type of catch drain shown in Figure 2.28 is usually about 0.3 m deep and is a function of the required
capacity. The width of the flat bottom drain will depend on the space available within the road reservation
and the likely run-off. The width and depth should be sufficient to carry the design flow, a width in the range
1.2 m to 2.5 m being typical.

Austroads 2023 | page 54


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

In erodible soils, it is preferable for the catch drain in-cut to take the form of a low mound along the top of the
batter (Figure 2.28) as a drain, cut into the surface, may rapidly erode and enlarge itself, or cause local slips
in the batter by piping. V-shaped drains (Figure 2.29:) are not preferred and should not be used in erodible
soils. Erosion assessment is discussed in AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.6.

Figure 2.28: Typical catch drain with flat bottom

Source: Austroads (2010) superseded.

Figure 2.29: Catch drain with V shape diagram

Depth 0.3 m minimum


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Slope 1:6
Drain Slope 1:6

Source: DTMR (2010).

2.15.2 Catch Banks

Catch banks (Figure 2.30) are sometimes used instead of drains to reduce effects of seepage on stability of
the batter slopes and also to minimise disturbed ground and hence scour potential. However, use of catch
banks alone may necessitate importation of suitable embankment material as in situ material may not be
suitable.

Figure 2.30: Catch bank diagram

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 55


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.15.3 Design Procedures – Catch Drains and Catch Banks

The design of catch drains and banks is based on the same methodology as for open channels. A freeboard
of at least 150 mm should be used. Where site conditions or some other constraint restricts the construction
of a channel with suitable dimensions, supplementary channel treatments such as synthetic channel linings,
riprap or concrete inverts should be utilised to withstand the higher velocities, Figure 2.31 shows an example
of a concrete lined catch drain.

Flow discharging from the catch drain should not be allowed to cause or aggravate erosion. Flow from a
catch drain may be discharged to an existing drain, watercourse, or to a chute.

Figure 2.31: Concrete-lined catch drain


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Worked Examples

2.16.1 Example 1: Manning’s Equation – Determine the Flow Rate, Velocity and State of Flow for a
Stream

This example describes the process, using Equation 1 and Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) to determine
the flow rate, the velocity of a flow and the state of flow in a stream based on the discussion in Section 2.3 –
Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow.

The example commences after the stream data (such as cross-section, terrain, condition of channel and
stream profile to determine site bed slope) has been gathered.

The task

Given the stream data and height of flow (see diagram below); determine the velocity of flow in the channel,
the flow rate and state of flow (i.e. subcritical, critical, or supercritical flow).

Stream data

The stream has the following characteristics:


• bed slope about the site is 0.8%
• the height of the channel bed is 110.60 m

Austroads 2023 | page 56


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• the channel is regular and considered a little rough with a lot of trees and weeds along the banks.

Height = 111.80 m
sides are
1 on 1
2.5 m

Solution

Determine the velocity of flow using Manning’s Equation first, then the flow rate using the fundamental
equation and finally, determine Froude’s Number to describe the state of flow. (See Section 2.3.3 –
Fundamental Equations, Section 2.3.4 – Application of Fundamental Equations and Section 2.3.5 – Energy
Principles).

Manning’s Equation is Equation 22:

2⁄ 1⁄ 22
𝑅 3 x𝑆 2
𝑉=
𝑛
where
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Hydraulic radius – the cross-sectional area of flow (A) divided by the wetted
𝑅 =
perimeter (P)

𝑆 = Slope of the energy line

The slope of the energy line (S) is not available; however, as the slope of the bed of the stream (So) is < 1%,
it can be used to approximate S.

Step 1

Calculate the cross-sectional area of the flow given that the depth of flow is 1.2 m.

A = 1.22 + 1.2 x 2.5 = 4.44 m2

Step 2

Calculate the wetted perimeter.

√(1.22 + 1.22 ) x 2 + 2.5 = 5.89 m

Step 3

Calculate the hydraulic radius.

R = A/P = 4.44/5.89 = 0.75 m

Step 4

Now determine an appropriate Manning’s roughness coefficient.

Austroads 2023 | page 57


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Using Table 2.2 in Section 2.3 – Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow, is channel, being the main channel
and regular in shape, is in the top portion of the table and within Section 1 of Table 2.2. The trees and weeds
would suggest (e), the range 0.06–0.08. Now, with the bed being a little rough, a value n = 0.07 (in the
middle of range) is considered appropriate.

Step 5

All variables have now been determined, therefore calculate velocity.

2⁄ 1⁄
0.75 3x 0.008 2
𝑉=
0.07

V = 1.06 m/s

Step 6

Using fundamental equation Q = V x A, the flow rate in the channel can now be determined.

Q = 1.06 x 4.44

= 4.71 m3/s

Step 7
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

To determine the ‘state of flow’, Froude’s Number is calculated.

𝐹𝑟 = 𝑄 √𝐵⁄𝑔 𝐴3

It has been determined that Q = 4.71 m3/s, A = 4.44 m2 and g is acceleration due to gravity (taken as 9.81
m/s2), B, the width of flow across the surface, has to be calculated.

B = 1.2 + 2.5 + 1.2 = 4.9 m

Therefore:

𝐹𝑟 = √4.9⁄(9.81 x 4.443 )

Fr = 0.36

Froude’s Number is below 1.0, therefore the flow is subcritical.

2.16.2 Example 2: Manning’s Equation – Determine the Depth and Velocity of Flow Based on a
Known Discharge/Flow Rate in a Stream

This example describes the process to determine the depth and velocity of flow based on a known
discharge/flow rate in a stream, based on discussion in Section 2.3 – Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow.

The example commences after the stream data (such as cross-section, terrain, condition of channel and
stream profile to determine site bed slope) has been gathered and the flow rate (as determined using the
Rational Method) has been estimated.

Austroads 2023 | page 58


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The task

Given the stream data and flow rate (see diagram below); determine the depth and velocity of flow in the
channel.

Stream data

The stream has the following characteristics:


• discharge/flow rate (Q) = 17.86 m3/s
• bed slope about the site (S) = 1.2%
• the height of the channel bed is 65.10 m
• the maximum depth of flow (d) is 2.0 m
• Manning’s Number, n = 0.06.

d = ?? m
sides are
1 on 1
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

4m

Solution

To solve for d, Manning’s Equation is used and a Stage-Discharge curve is developed. Manning’s Equation,
Equation 3, repeated here:

2⁄ 1⁄
𝑅 3 x𝑆 2
𝑉 =
𝑛

A Stage-Discharge curve plots discharge against depth of flow. Therefore several iterations using Manning’s
Equation are required for several depths of flow.

Step 1

Using the maximum channel depth of 2.0 m, calculate stream velocity and flow rate.

Calculate the cross-sectional area of the flow, wetted perimeter and hydraulic radius:

A = 12.00 m2, P = 9.66 m therefore R = 1.24 m


2⁄ 1⁄
1.24 3x 0.012 2
𝑉= = 2.11 m⁄s
0.06

Using Q = V x A

Therefore:

Q = 2.11 x 12

Austroads 2023 | page 59


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Q = 25.33 m3/s

This flow is greater than the known discharge therefore we know that the channel can easily carry the flow.

Step 2

Using the same method, re-calculate stream velocity and flow rate for several lesser depths (suggest using
even increments).

Wetted perimeter Hydraulic radius


Depth Area (A) Velocity (V) Discharge (Q)
(P) (R)
(m) (m2) (m/s) (m3/s)
(m) (m)
1.50 8.25 8.24 1.00 1.83 15.07
1.00 5.00 6.83 0.73 1.48 7.42
0.50 2.25 5.41 0.42 1.02 2.29

Step 3

Now draw the Stage-Discharge curve, Figure 2.32, for this site/channel.

Step 4
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

From the curve, the flow depth for the design flow is 17.86 m3/s.

Q = 17.86 m3/s, therefore d = 1.65 m

Step 5

The depth can be used to calculate flow area, then Q = V x A to determine the average flow velocity.

A = 1.652 + 1.65 x 4 = 9.32 m2

17.86 m3/s = V x 9.32 m2

V = 1.92 m/s

Austroads 2023 | page 60


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 2.32: Stage–Discharge curve

Stage-Discharge Curve

30

25

20
Flow Rate (m3/s)

15

10

0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Flow Depth (m)

Source: DTMR (2010).

Step 5 (Check)
Wetted perimeter (P) = 2√(2 x 1.652) + 4 = 8.66 m

Hence R = 9.32/8.66 = 1.0762

V = 1.07642/3 0.012½/0.06 = 1.92 m/s

Q = 17.86 m3/s

Agreement with design discharge, therefore OK.

2.16.3 Example 3: Manning’s Equation: Determine the Flow Rate and Average Velocity in a
Compound Stream

This example describes the process to determine the flow rate and the average velocity of a flow in a
compound stream based on discussion in Section 2.7.1 – Design Methodology.

The example commences after the stream data (such as cross-section, terrain, Manning’s n and stream
profile to determine site bed slope) has been gathered.

The task

Given the stream data and height of flow (see diagram below); determine the average velocity of flow in the
channel and the flow rate.

Austroads 2023 | page 61


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Stream data

Bed slope about the site is 0.8%.

d = 1.2 m d = 2.1 m d = 1.0 m n values


A C A = 0.07
sides are B B = 0.035
3m
1 on 1 4m C = 0.06
2m

Solution

To solve for Q, we need to use Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) is used for each sub-section of stream:
2⁄ 1⁄
𝑅 3 x𝑆 2
𝑉=
𝑛

After calculating V for each sub-section, use Qtotal = VA x AA + VB x AB + VC x AC to determine total flow rate.

Step 1
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

For sub-section A, calculate VA using Manning’s Equation.

Calculate the cross-sectional area of the flow wetted perimeter and hydraulic radius for sub-section A, using
Equation 4 repeated here:

𝐴
𝑅=
𝑃

Therefore:

1.22
( ) + 1.2 𝑥 4.0
2
𝑅=
√1.22 + 1.22 + 4.0

𝑅 = 0.97 𝑚

It is important to remember that the water – water boundary between sub-sections A & B does not contribute
any length to the wetted perimeter.

RA = A/P = 5.52/5.70 = 0.97 m


2⁄ 1⁄
0.97 3x 0.008 2
𝑉𝐴 = = 1.25 𝑚⁄𝑠
0.07

Using Q = V x A,

Q = 1.25 x 5.52
Q = 6.90 m3/s

Austroads 2023 | page 62


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 2

For sub-section B, calculate VB using Manning’s Equation.

AB = 7.39 m2

PB = 4.83 m

RB = 1.53 m
2⁄ 1⁄
1.531 3x 0.008 2
𝑉𝐵 = = 3.40 𝑚⁄𝑠
0.035

Using Q = V x A,

𝑄𝐵 = 3.40 x 7.39

QB = 25.09 m3/s

Step 3

For sub-section C, calculate VC using Manning’s Equation.

AC = 3.50 m2
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

PC = 4.41 m

RC = 0.79 m
2⁄ 1⁄
0.793 3x 0.008 2
𝑉𝑐 = = 1.28 𝑚⁄𝑠
0.06

Using Q = V x A,

𝑄𝑐 = 1.28 𝑥 3.50

QC = 4.47 m3/s.

Step 4

Now calculate:

Qtotal = 6.90 + 25.09 + 4.47 = 36.46 m3/s

and

Atotal = 5.52 + 7.39 + 3.50 = 16.41 m2

Therefore:

Vave = 36.46/16.41 = 2.22 m/s.

Austroads 2023 | page 63


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

2.16.4 Example 4: Hard-lined/Rigid Boundary Channel Design

This example describes the process to design an open channel based on flow rate, selected channel side
slopes and other key properties as discussed in Section 2.7.1 – Design Methodology.

The task

Given the following channel cross-section and data, and using the channel bed slope to approximate the
Friction Slope (Sf), design a concrete-lined, trapezoidal channel.

Channel cross-section:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Solution

For best hydraulic section (Equation 15):

𝑏𝑦 + 𝑋𝑦 2 𝑦
𝑅= =
2√𝑦 2 + (𝑦𝑋)2 +𝑏 2

Step 1

Substitute X=2 and resolve for b as a function of y.

𝑏𝑦 + 2𝑦 2 𝑦
𝑅= =
2√𝑦 2 + (2𝑦)2 +𝑏 2

𝑏 = 𝑦(2√5 − 4)

Step 2

Combine Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) and Equation 1, then substitute in Q = 75 m3/s,


A = by + Xy2, R=y/2, So = 0.0025 (remember; So estimates Sf) and n = 0.014:

2
𝑦 ⁄3 1
(𝑏𝑦 + 2𝑦 2 ) ( ) 0.0025 ⁄2
75 = 2
0.014

Austroads 2023 | page 64


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

𝑦 2⁄3
21 = (𝑏𝑦 + 2 𝑦 2 ) ( )
2

Now substitute:

𝑏 = 𝑦(2√5 − 4)

The expression becomes:

𝑦 2⁄3
21 = ((𝑦(2√5 − 4)) 𝑦 + 2𝑦 2 ) ( )
2

and

y = 2.65 m, depth of flow

Step 3

Calculate b using y:

𝑏 = 𝑦(2√5 − 4)

𝑏 = 2.65 x (2 √5 − 4) = 1.25 m, width of bed


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 4

Calculate freeboard.

In accordance with Section 2.7.1 – Design Methodology, freeboard is the greater value of:
1. 300 mm
2. 20% of 2.65 m = 530 mm
3. Area of flow = 17.36 m2.

Therefore:

𝑄
𝑉=
𝐴
75
𝑉=
17.36

V = 4.32 m/s

𝑉2
𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑑 =
2𝑔
4.322
𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑑 =
2 x 9.81

Velocity head = 950 mm

Select the greater of (1), (2) and (3).

Austroads 2023 | page 65


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Therefore, freeboard is 950 mm.

Step 5

Check the Froude Number (Equation 11):

11.85
𝐹𝑟 = 75 √
𝑔17.363

=1.14 Supercritical

Step 6

Determine final channel geometry:

Width =11.85m

Depth=3.60m V=4.32m/s
y=2.65m
Supercritical
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

b=1.25m

2.16.5 Example 5: Vegetated/Erodible Boundary Channel Design

This example describes the process to design an open channel based on flow rate, selected channel side
slopes and other key properties, as discussed in Section 2.7.1 – Design Methodology.

Given the following cross-section and data, and using the channel bed slope to approximate the Friction
slope (Sf) design a vegetated, trapezoidal channel in red soil (assume 70% coverage).

Channel cross-section:

Austroads 2023 | page 66


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Solution

Step 1

Use basic equation (Equation 1) to determine waterway area:

𝑄 =𝑉x𝐴

𝑄
𝐴=
𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥

Using Table 2.6: , find Vmax as 1.8 m/s [upper part of table (red soil), 0.70 coverage and 2% channel
gradient].

𝑄 15
𝐴= = = 8.33 𝑚2
𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥 1.8

Step 2

Combine Manning’s Equation (Equation 3) and Equation 1, then rearrange into a function of P:

2⁄ 1⁄2
𝐴𝑅 3𝑆
𝑜
𝑄=
𝑛
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

3⁄
5⁄ 1⁄2 2
𝐴 3𝑆
𝑜
𝑃= ( )
𝑄𝑛

Now substitute known values in the previous equation and solve for P using Q = 15 m3/s,
A = 8.33 m2, R = A/P, So = 0.02 (remember; So estimates Sf) and n = 0.07.

3⁄
5 1⁄ 2
8.33 ⁄3 0.02 2
𝑃= ( ) = 9.90 𝑚
15 x 0.07

Step 3

Based on channel geometry, the two expressions for A and P are:

𝐴 = (𝑏 + 𝑦𝑋)𝑦

𝑃 = 2𝑦√𝑋 2 + 1 + 𝑏

Combine these expressions and solve for y:

𝐴 = (𝑏 + 𝑋𝑦)𝑦

𝐴
𝑏= − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

Now substitute the expression for b into the equation for P:

Austroads 2023 | page 67


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

𝑃 = 2𝑦√𝑋 2 + 1 + 𝑏

𝐴
𝑃 = 2𝑦√𝑋 2 + 1 + − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

𝐴
𝑃 = (2 √𝑋 2 + 1 − 𝑋) 𝑦 +
𝑦

𝑃𝑦 = (2√𝑋 2 + 1 − 𝑋) 𝑦 2 + 𝐴

0 = (2√𝑋 2 + 1 − 𝑋) 𝑦 2 − 𝑃𝑦 + 𝐴

This is a quadratic equation where:

𝑎 = 2 √𝑋 2 + 1 − 𝑋

𝑏 = −𝑃𝑐 = 𝐴

Now substitute in known values for X, P and A and solve the quadratic equation.

Solution for a quadratic equation is:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

−𝑏 ± √𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑐
𝑦=
2𝑎

Therefore:

9.90 ± 3.96
𝑦=
4.94

The solutions (roots) for equation (y) are 2.80 and 1.20.

Now:

𝐴
𝑏= − 𝑦𝑋
𝑦

Solution 1 (when y = 2.8) is –2.63 and Solution 2 (when y = 1.2) is 4.54.

Dismiss negative solution, hence y = 1.20 m and b = 4.54 m

Step 4

Calculate freeboard.

In accordance with Section 2.7.1 – Design Methodology freeboard is the greater of:
• 300 mm
• 20% of 1.20 m = 240 mm
• Velocity head = V2/2g = 1.82/2 x 9.81 = 92 mm

Select greater of (1), (2) and (3). Therefore freeboard is 300 mm.

Austroads 2023 | page 68


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 5

Check the Froude Number (Equation 11):

B = 4.54 + 2(2 x 1.20) = 9.34 m

𝟗.𝟑𝟒
𝑭𝒓 = 𝟏𝟓√ = 𝟎. 𝟔𝟏 Subcritical
(𝟗.𝟖𝟏 𝒙 𝟖.𝟑𝟑𝟑 )

Step 6

Determine final channel geometry:

Width = 9.34 m
Width =.9.34m

Depth = 1.50 m
Depth=1.50m VV=1.8m/s
= 1.8 m/s
yy=1.20m
= 1.20 m
Subcritical

b b=4.54m
= 4.54 m
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 69


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Culverts

Introduction

Culverts must be designed to satisfy the hydraulic requirements associated with conveying water under
roads and to have the structural strength to carry construction or highway traffic loads and loads associated
with the road formation.

In designing culverts, a number of issues must be considered including:


• economy (e.g. cost of the project and available budget)
• road immunity – the extent to which flows are passed through culverts under the road rather than
allowed to overtop the road and force its closure
• stream characteristics such as channel shape, slope and natural stream flow (also consider possible
stream morphology over the life of the culvert)
• the culvert structure including type, material, size and number of pipes or cells
• afflux (i.e. the change in water height caused by the road and culvert/restriction)
• tailwater and presence of possible backwater effects
• the culvert’s outlet velocity and flow energy
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• erosion, upstream and downstream


• groundwater effects (including longitudinal seepage, piping and erosion – considering the need for cut-
off collars)
• groundwater conditions (including pipe strength, culvert settlement and culvert anchorage when located
on steep slopes)
• the special needs of culverts which are to be used as fishways, for the passage of terrestrial fauna or as
cattle creeps, or underpasses (larger culverts will often be required for fauna or fish passage than for
hydraulic reasons)
• safety and access (i.e. catering for the needs of pedestrians, cyclists, or maintenance crews)
• durability – design life of the structure
• environmental issues (minimising the potential for unacceptable environmental damage).

Information Required

It is important to gather all required information before design commences. Some information should be
gathered/verified by site inspection.

The catchment area should be carefully defined from maps, as well as aerial photographs and
photogrammetry if available. It is usual to survey the stream bed and adjacent land upstream and
downstream of the culvert site and features such as other culverts, houses and commercial developments
(and possibly their floor heights, if it appears that they might be more at risk of flooding due to the new
culvert).

Land use adjacent to the culvert site and any utility services (public or private) which may influence the
location and height of the culvert should also be noted. Important information in relation to the highest
known past flood heights can be obtained by interviewing residents and road maintenance supervisors.
The designer should also inspect the site thoroughly as the survey may not show all the details relevant to
good design and ease of construction.

Austroads 2023 | page 70


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

A preliminary road design is also required to determine maximum culvert size (height) for possible trial
culvert configurations, to check any clearance or cover requirements and to determine allowable headwater
criteria. Other data required includes hydraulic performance criteria for road section or link, any
environmental requirements/constraints and most importantly rainfall data.

Further information on the data required is in Section 3.10 – Design Procedures which provides a generic
list of required information. Also, designers should see AGRD Part 5 – Section 6 for hydrologic
assessment.

Culvert Location

In most cases, with the exception of wide floodways, culvert locations are predetermined by the intersection
of a watercourse within an existing or proposed roadway. In general, a culvert should be located to fit within
the natural channel in line and grade as far as is practical. However, the culvert location and size should be
chosen to:
• achieve good hydraulic performance
• ensure stability of the stream bed and banks
• reduce risks for errant vehicles
• minimise construction risks
• minimise construction and maintenance costs.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Where circumstances allow, culverts should be located away from:


• erodible or meandering channel bends or banks
• critical or isolated aquatic habitat areas
• isolated sections of remnant, valued, or protected riparian vegetation.

3.3.1 Horizontal Alignment

A culvert should be laid on a straight alignment, which may be either perpendicular or skewed to the road
centreline. The natural skew in a channel should be adopted wherever possible, as a culvert on a different
skew could cause progressive bank erosion, which may possibly encroach into private property. Protection
of a bank at risk from erosion could be costly.

Realigning short sections of an existing channel to fit the culvert alignment should be avoided as
realignment of a natural channel requires careful design to avoid erosion, and such channel re-alignments
may require the approval of the statutory or other drainage authority.

Where severe changes in channel alignment are necessary, it is recommended that the culvert not be
placed perpendicular to the road as short radius bends in the channel are likely to lead to erosion on the
concave bank and to a build-up of sediment on the opposite bank (Figure 3.1). The road alignment should
as much as possible avoid crossings in such locations.

Where following the natural channel would result in a very long skewed road crossing, it may be cheaper to
construct a stream deviation (see Options A and B in Figure 3.2).

Austroads 2023 | page 71


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.1: Stream alignment options Figure 3.2: Stream alignment options (A and B)
(preferred option A to avoid bank erosion)

Source: VicRoads (2003).

3.3.2 Vertical Profile

Most culvert profiles should approximate the natural streambed. Other profiles may be chosen for either
economic or hydraulic reasons. Slopes other than that of the natural stream, can be used to prevent stream
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

degradation, minimise sedimentation, improve the hydraulic performance of the culvert, shorten the culvert,
or reduce structural requirements. Culverts are typically smoother than the natural channel and hence an
increase in flow velocity is expected. Careful design and detailing is required to control steam erosion and
deposition. Slope alterations should, therefore, be given special attention to ensure that detrimental effects
do not result from the change.

Culvert grading options are shown in Figure 3.3. The designer should check whether energy dissipation is
required so that damage will not occur upstream or downstream (see Section 3.13 – Culvert Outlet
Protection).

The culvert should be designed to:


• suit the outlet conditions even if inlet conditions have to be modified (e.g. a drop inlet to reduce potential
scouring velocities through the culvert). High outlet velocities can cause erosion for a significant
distance downstream of an outlet. Where high outlet velocities are expected, appropriate dissipation
measures and/or protection measures will be required
• be free from sediment deposits, which tend to occur on the inside of stream bends, or where there is an
abrupt change from the stream slope to a flatter grade in the culvert.

3.3.3 Non-hydraulic Considerations

Provision must also be made for fauna and stock movement as required. Where roads traverse broad flood
plains or otherwise interfere with overland flow patterns, regular culverts may be needed to mitigate against
the adverse environmental effects of drainage shadow. See AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.7.10, for this and
other environmental aspects.

Austroads 2023 | page 72


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.3: Culvert grading options


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Adapted from VicRoads (2003).

Austroads 2023 | page 73


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Culvert Type

The selection of the most appropriate type of culvert is dependent on a range of factors including
economics, site conditions, hydraulic performance, limitations on allowable water height at inlet, height of
fill above the obvert, channel width, structural requirements, durability, ease of construction, the possibility
of blocking by debris and environmental considerations.

3.4.1 Culvert Shape

The most common culvert type is the pipe because it is hydraulically and structurally efficient in most
cases, and is cheaper to produce than a comparable box shaped culvert (including inverted units).

Box culverts are advantageous where:


• there is minimal embankment depth (boxes require less material cover)
• there are channel width restrictions
• for single barrels a pipe having equivalent waterway area to a box is wider for the same height
• for multiple pipe culverts backfill is required between the barrels whereas boxes may be placed side by
side
• a rectangular waterway achieves the allowable headwater
• fauna or livestock passage is required
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• there is a need to minimise or control low-flow water depths.

It is important to select the culvert shape that will best fit the waterway. Multiple pipes or rectangular units
are useful in wide channels where the constriction or concentration of flow is to be kept to a minimum. In
the case of a box culvert, it is usually more economical to use multiple units than a wide single span. With
multi-cell construction, box culverts combined with link slabs is often an economical choice. In particular
circumstances (e.g. to minimise channel and bank disturbances), arches may also be appropriate and
economical.

Reference should also be made to jurisdictional standard drawings and/or Australian Standards for
installation requirements including cover, spacing and details for relevant support conditions.

3.4.2 Materials

The most common type of material used in the construction of culverts is steel reinforced concrete.
However, in many circumstances other materials, such as fibre-reinforced concrete, corrugated metals
(steel and aluminium) and plastics (polyvinyl chlorides, polypropylenes and polyethylenes) have been used.
This Guide defines rigid culverts as made of steel reinforced concrete, while semi-rigid culverts are made
from all other materials.

Steel reinforced concrete culverts typically have lower cover requirements and do not deflect as a result of
poor compaction (see AGRD Part 5 – Appendix B). Alternatively, ‘flexible’ culverts (able to deflect under
load) offer ease of transportation and installation as benefits. Depending on the flexible material used they
may also offer advantages such as lower cost, chemical inertness and hydraulic smoothness. It should be
noted that some jurisdictions have restrictions over the use of some flexible culvert materials.

The use of semi-rigid or flexible culverts requires a higher level of workmanship and higher specified
backfill material, as compared to rigid pipes, to ensure that culvert shape and barrel stability is ensured. As
a consequence, these culverts are more susceptible to ground disturbance after installation and hence are
not preferred when there are buried utilities in close proximity.

Austroads 2023 | page 74


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Unless there are large financial savings, or other construction restraints, more robust and durable materials
should be used. AGRD Part 5 – Appendix B provides a summary of these materials as well as their sizes,
strengths, stock lengths, joint types, restrictions, and typical use.

Aluminium culverts referred to in AGRD Part 5 – Appendix B have been used in small quantities by some
road agencies. Aluminium is suitable for use in soils that have a pH in the range 4 to 9. This pH range is
aggressive to many materials and aluminium culverts represent a durable solution in these environments.
Design criteria for aluminium culverts are covered in AS/NZS 2041.1.

Aluminium is not as strong as steel; consequently, a larger wall thickness is required to provide an
installation that has an equivalent strength to steel. Aluminium is also more expensive than steel.

In high groundwater situations sealed pipe joints may result in culvert flotation. An alternative is to utilise a
geotextile joint strap and use the culvert as a subsoil pipe. With this detailing a lower groundwater height
can be expected, and enhanced pavement protection can be achieved.

In selecting culvert type and material, the work health and safety requirements for inspecting and
maintaining the culvert must be considered.

Further information on the use and applicability of various materials used in drainage is provided in AGRD
Part 5 – Appendix B.

Culvert Size
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

3.5.1 Minimum Culvert Size Allowable

The recommended minimum diameter of any pipe culvert subject to road agency requirements is 375 mm
to 450 mm diameter in order to reduce the likelihood of blockage. Smaller pipe diameters may require
greater inspection and maintenance regimes.

Whilst the minimum recommended size of culverts across a road formation is 375 mm diameter, a larger
size may be necessary where debris occurs. Where there is the possibility of blockage and pipe settlement,
a 750 mm minimum culvert diameter is recommended to allow access for maintenance inspection.

The recommended minimum height of any box section, subject to road agency requirements, is 375 mm.

In selecting the culvert size, the Work Health and Safety requirements for inspecting and maintaining the
culvert must be considered.

3.5.2 Other Sizing Considerations

Considerations for the selection of culvert size are:


• A culvert flowing full makes the most use of the waterway opening available. The culvert opening height
should desirably match the tailwater depth; however, it is recommended that the height not be greater
than 1.25 times the depth of the tailwater. Typically, this results in an outlet control culvert which gives a
near full flow with lower outlet velocities. Culverts will generally not flow full if operating under inlet
control.
• The larger the opening, the less prone to blocking of the waterway by debris. The minimum culvert size
required for debris passage should be assessed including the likely debris (type and size), the risk of
blockage and likely impacts of subsequent failure of the culvert.

Environmental considerations, including the needs of fish, fauna and stock in the area should also be taken
into account. See AGRD Part 5 – Section 3, and Austroads Guide to Road Design Part 6A: Paths for
Walking and Cycling (AGRD Part 6A) (Austroads 2017), for more information.

Austroads 2023 | page 75


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

For culverts used as pedestrian and cyclist facilities the minimum recommended invert height is the one in
two year flood height. For further information, see AGRD Part 6A (Austroads 2017).

Following the selection of the size for culverts that are used for drainage and other purposes, the
hydrologic calculations should then be re-checked to confirm adequate hydraulic operation and
performance, including blockage potential.

Structural Requirements

The design loading on culverts to ensure that they have adequate structural strength must be in
accordance with the road agency’s requirements.

3.6.1 Design Loads

Loads on culverts include:


• Dead loads
– fill over the structure, which is a function of:
– height of fill
– type of fill material
– installation conditions e.g. ‘trench’ or ‘embankment’.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• Live loads
– design traffic loads
– construction traffic loads
– other or abnormal load conditions.

The load-bearing capacity of a culvert is a function of:


• unit strength (e.g. pipe class)
• type of bedding and backfill material
• pipe diameter (excluding box culverts)
• pipe material.

At sites that are susceptible to earthquakes, longitudinal connectivity of the culvert, robustness of the
culvert foundation and anchorage provided by the inlet and outlet structures, should be considered to
mitigate the effects associated with:
• foundation liquefaction
• road formation spreading laterally
• batter instability.

3.6.2 Existing Culverts

Culverts that are to be retained in a project need to be checked for both hydraulic capacity and structural
durability. Construction staging and final design cover should also be reviewed. See AGRD Part 5 –
Appendix B for further guidance.

Austroads 2023 | page 76


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.6.3 Space between Pipes in Multiple–Barrel Culverts

When two or more pipe barrels are laid parallel, they should be separated by a distance that is sufficient to
enable thorough compaction of the back-fill material which is essential for haunch support and the
prevention of settlement. Typical minimum spacing is governed by the type of compaction equipment,
however a controlled low strength material, flowable or stabilised backfill (see AS/NZS 3725) can be
compacted using vibratory rods rather than plate compactors and therefore pipe spacing may be reduced.

Multiple pipe culverts should always be treated as an embankment installation when determining the class
of pipe required from the allowable height of cover. Even for culverts installed in trench conditions, the
height of cover should be calculated for embankment installation.

Box culverts are typically laid without a gap between the lines of culvert units.

3.6.4 Cover

The desirable minimum cover to be adopted for design purposes for box culverts is 0.1 metres below the
subgrade height, to allow for continuous usage of paving machinery. However if necessary, the absolute
minimum cover can be 0.1 metres to finished surface height, that is, the culvert can be laid in the pavement
layers. Advice should be sought from experienced structural and pavement engineers before adopting the
absolute minimum condition to ensure appropriate structural integrity is provided and that cracking induced
at the culvert joint does not reflect to the pavement surface.

For box culverts the maximum economic height of fill or depth of trench is about 1.5 metres. Boxes or
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

crown units required to carry greater depths may be specially designed by an accredited structural
designer.

A special treatment such as the induced trench methods may have to be designed so as to retain existing
box culverts where proposed heights of fill exceed 1.5 metres.

Maximum cover limits apply to box culverts, designers should see the manufacturer’s specifications and the
road agency’s specific requirements for cover depths.

For cover requirements for pipe culverts, see AGRD Part 5A – Section 6.4.1.

Hydraulic Design Considerations

3.7.1 Design Discharge

The design discharge for a culvert is the discharge the culvert is designed to pass based on an accepted
average recurrence interval (ARI). Typically, this discharge equals the catchment run–off as calculated by
the method set out in AGRD Part 5 – Section 6.

The performance of a culvert should be checked for a range of design discharges, and these shall include
the:
• level of serviceability provided to road users
• serviceability limit state for the culvert – no damage shall occur to the culvert as a result of the design
average recurrence interval (ARI) event or more frequent events
• ultimate limit state for the culvert (culvert or embankment failure may occur under less frequent events)
• environmental flow conditions for fish passage or water quality design.

For design discharge criteria, see AGRD Part 5 – Table 4.2 and Table 4.3, or the relevant road agency’s
policy documents as immunity/accessibility levels vary depending on class and/or function of the road.

Austroads 2023 | page 77


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.7.2 Outlet Velocity

Part of the road drainage design process is the determination of acceptable or maximum allowable
velocities for stormwater flows. It should be noted that these velocities are largely based on research that
identified the velocity when erosion/scour started to occur in different soil/stream types. The maximum
allowable velocities for a project are then used in the design of various drainage structures/devices (e.g.
culverts and channels) to ensure design discharge through those devices is below the set maximum
allowable velocity for that location. Some design solutions that may be adopted are based on velocities that
are equal to, or just below, the set maximum allowable velocity.

High outlet velocities can cause bank erosion downstream of an outlet. Where high outlet velocities are
expected, appropriate protection and/or dissipation measures will be required. Where possible, culverts
should be designed to provide acceptable velocities without the need for additional stream bed protection.
Allowable stream velocities to avoid scour vary according to soil type and topography. Some suggested
outlet velocities for various stream bed materials are given in Table 3.1. Scour and preventative measures
are discussed further in Section 3.13 – Culvert Outlet Protection.

Table 3.1: Suggested culvert outlet velocities

Material downstream of culvert endwall Allowable velocity (m/s)

Stable rock 4.5


Stones 150 mm diameter or larger 3.5
Gravel 100 mm or grass cover 2.5
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Firm loam or stiff clay 1.2–2.0


Sandy or silty clay 1.0–1.5

Note: These are target velocities at the culvert outlet.


Source: DTMR (2010).

It is desirable that culvert outlet flows be subcritical as this will eliminate a hydraulic jump occurring at or
downstream of the outlet and minimise scour due to the energy dissipation (when flows change from
supercritical to subcritical flow). The Froude Number can be used to determine the flow regime, see
Section 3.10.10 – Outlet Flow Energy.

See Appendix E.1.1 for an example of using the Manning’s Equation to determine flow characteristics for
an existing channel in order to provide conditions for the design of a new culvert.

3.7.3 Culverts in Flat Terrain

In flat terrain, drainage channels are often ill-defined or non-existent and culverts should be located and
designed for least disruption of the existing flow conditions. In these locations multiple culverts can be
considered to have a common headwater elevation, although this will not be precise.

It may also be necessary to construct levee banks (Figure 3.4), to achieve the design headwater at the
culvert location. Where necessary, approval of the local drainage authority should be obtained prior to
construction of any levee banks.

Austroads 2023 | page 78


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.4: Development of headwater

3.7.4 Siltation and Blockage

The likelihood of blockage should be considered for all culverts. Blockage can occur through siltation or
vegetation, though blockage by siltation is more likely to be temporary in nature, because during flood
events, silt deposits can be removed by high velocity flows. To prevent siltation the desirable minimum
velocity in the culvert should be above 0.7 m/s. A check of velocities should be undertaken as part of
design.

Where blockage caused by debris (larger objects) is considered likely, larger culvert sizes may be required.
This will allow the debris to pass through the culvert and minimise the risk of blockage and of any adverse
impacts that could occur to the roadway and/or to surrounding properties. Road agencies and/or drainage
authorities may apply a blockage factor, with further information on the calculation of appropriate factors
contained in AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

3.7.5 Allowable Headwater (AHW)

The allowable headwater for a culvert will usually be determined by one or more of the following conditions:
• The elevation of upstream ponding should not cause unacceptable damage or adverse effects to
adjacent properties. The extent of any upstream flooding of properties should be ascertained from field
investigations or by design calculations.
• Where a road is designed not to be overtopped during a set ARI flood event, it is desirable to provide
freeboard of at least 100 mm between the design upstream floodwater surface and the upstream
shoulder edge. Where this is not economically acceptable, pavement design should make allowance for
higher water heights, and the likely duration of inundation.
• In the event of both of the above conditions permitting a high headwater, the associated outlet velocity
may be intolerably high. In this case, the allowable headwater may have to be reduced to limit the outlet
velocity to an acceptable value, that is, one that does not cause unacceptable scouring.
• Where practicable, it is desirable to keep the headwater/afflux in the road reserve or upstream with the
landowner’s permission.
• The elevation of upstream ponding should not cause unexpected hazards to people or stock.
• Where floodwaters are expected to remain on or over the road embankment for some time, the road
embankment design should allow for infiltration of floodwater depending on the anticipated duration of
inundation.
• When overtopping flow needs to be considered, the overtopping flow conditions shall be determined
using Section 4 – Floodway Crossings, and superimposed with the culvert flow conditions and the
ponding and scour effects limited or mitigated as necessary.

Austroads 2023 | page 79


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.7.6 Tailwater (TW)

Tailwater (TW) is the normal water depth within the existing channel for the design discharge. The tailwater
depth should be determined adjacent to the culvert outlet. Tailwater height is an important aspect of culvert
design because:
• A high tailwater may cause the culvert to flow full or under pressure, so increasing the headwater
necessary to pass the flow.
• A low tailwater relative to the depth of flow in the culvert can result in erosion of the downstream
channel.

If the channel is regular in shape and uniform flow conditions can be reasonably expected, the tailwater
depth can be determined using Manning’s Equation see Section 2.7 – Open Channel Design.

For complex channels, backwater models such as the Hydraulic Engineering Centres River Analysis
System (HEC-RAS) can be used, though this would normally only be necessary for large streams. This
work should be undertaken by a specialist hydraulic engineer.

Typical Culvert Operating Conditions

3.8.1 General

The most important consideration in culvert hydraulic performance is whether the flow is subject to inlet or
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

outlet control. Figure 3.5 shows eight typical conditions under which culverts may operate (i.e. the range of
flow types commonly encountered in culverts). For inlet control two distinct regimes exist, depending on
whether the inlet is submerged or not submerged. Outlet control occurs in long culverts, culverts laid on flat
grades and culverts with high tailwater depths.

A study of Figure 3.5 will reveal that the prediction of inlet or outlet control is not precise and the standard
procedure for calculation is to assume each control situation in turn, the control situation with the highest
calculated headwater being adopted for design.

Checks should be made to ensure a submerged inlet type (HW > 1.2D). Submerged inlets usually have
more driving head which helps improve culvert capacity/performance, which is preferable.

The desirable control condition is outlet control as shown in Type 7 in Figure 3.5.

3.8.2 Inlet Control Conditions

For inlet control, the capacity of the culvert barrel is greater than that of the inlet. Hence, culvert capacity is
dictated by conditions at the inlet. Under these situations the important factors are the cross-sectional area
of the culvert barrel, the depth of headwater or ponding at the entrance and the entrance conditions,
including the entrance type, existence and angle of headwalls and wingwalls, and the projection of the
culvert into the headwater.

For one-dimensional flow, the relationship between the discharge and the upstream energy can be
computed by an iterative process or by the use of nomographs.

Inlet control can occur with the inlet submerged and the outlet not submerged. Under these conditions, the
flow contracts to a supercritical jet immediately downstream from the inlet. When the tailwater depth
exceeds critical depth, dc and the culvert is laid on a steep grade, flow remains supercritical in the barrel
and a hydraulic jump will form near the outlet. If the culvert is laid on a slope less than critical, then a
hydraulic jump will form in the barrel.

Austroads 2023 | page 80


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

When the culvert flows under inlet control, the roughness and length of the culvert barrel and the outlet
conditions (including the depth of tailwater) are not factors in determining culvert capacity. An increase in
the slope of the culvert reduces headwater only to a small degree, and can normally be neglected for
conventional culverts flowing under inlet control.

In Figure 3.5, Types 3, 4, 5 and 8 are operating under inlet control.

Figure 3.5: Typical conditions under which standard culverts operate


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Type 7 is the preferred option

Source: Herr and Bossy, cited in DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 81


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.8.3 Outlet Control Conditions

With outlet control, the culvert flow is restricted to the discharge which can pass through the conduit for a
given height of water in the outlet channel (tailwater height). The slope, cross-sectional area, roughness,
and length of the culvert barrel have to be considered as these losses exceed the inlet losses. However,
inlet size, shape and edge geometry can still affect the capacity.

In general the control will be at the outlet if the culvert slope is less than critical. A tailwater depth equal to
80% or more of the height of the culvert barrel/cell will usually indicate outlet control, except in rolling or
mountainous country with the culvert on natural surface slopes. However, a check of the design assuming
inlet control is such an easy process that it forms part of standard design procedure.

Culverts flowing with outlet control can flow with the culvert barrel full or with the barrel part-full for all of the
culvert length. With outlet control, having both the inlet and the outlet submerged, the culvert flows full and
under pressure. The culvert also can flow full over part of its length with part-full flow at the outlet. The point
at which the water surface breaks away from the barrel obvert depends on the tailwater depth and culvert
grade, and can be determined by using flow profile calculations.

If the culvert is laid at a flat grade, outlet control can occur with both inlet and outlet not submerged, and the
part-full flow throughout the culvert length will be flowing under sub-critical conditions.

Variations of these main types of flow conditions can occur, depending on the relative value of critical
slope, normal depth, culvert height and tailwater depth. While the potential flow conditions shown in
Figure 3.5 are the most common for simple culverts, different flow conditions are possible where complex
culvert structures are required. Advice may be required from an expert in such cases.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

In Figure 3.5, Types 1, 2, 6 and 7 have outlet control.

Hydraulic Calculations

The hydraulic design of culverts should be undertaken either manually as described in this Guide, or by
using software approved by the relevant authority.

The following design methodology (this section) and design procedure (Section 3.10 – Design Procedures)
are based on the use of nomographs (see Appendix B for inlet and outlet control nomographs) and
provides an understanding of the hydraulic design of culverts. Other methods of culvert design, including
the use of formula, are available however use of these methods requires approval by the relevant road
agency.

Irrespective of the hydraulic analysis method used, the Hydraulic Grade Line for the partially or fully
pressurised culvert shall be determined. The hydraulic parameters to be determined are shown in
Figure 3.6.

Austroads 2023 | page 82


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.9.1 Control at Outlet

Flow under outlet control can be calculated from the formulae below, the parameters for which are
illustrated in Figure 3.6. The total head (H) required to convey water through a culvert flowing under outlet
control is determined by Equation 23:

H = He + Hf + Hv 23

where

𝑉2
He = Entrance loss (m) = 𝑘𝑒 2𝑔

19.6 𝑛2 𝐿 𝑉2
Hf = Friction loss (m) = 𝑅 1.33
x
2𝑔

𝑉2
Hv = Velocity head (m) = 2𝑔

and

𝑉 = Mean velocity of flow in the culvert barrel (m/s)

𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (assume 9.81 m/s2)


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝑘𝑒 = Entrance loss coefficient (see Table 3.2)

𝑛 = Manning’s roughness coefficient

𝐿 = Length of culvert barrel (m)

𝑅 = Hydraulic radius (m)

Figure 3.6: Hydraulics of culvert flowing full under outlet control


2
V1 2
2g V
2g WS = water surface
S = slope of culvert
WS
W.S He
.
Energy Lin
e Hf
HW Hydraulic G H
V
1
h1 rade Line
Hv W.S
D .
SoS
V h2
LS
LSo dhcc DATUM

LL

Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Substituting in the first equation (Equation 23) above and simplifying:


19.6 𝑛2 𝐿 𝑉2
𝐻 = (1 + 𝑘𝑒 + ) x
𝑅1.33 2𝑔

Austroads 2023 | page 83


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

This equation can be solved for H by the use of the full flow nomographs in Appendix B, Figure B 5 and
Figure B 6 for concrete culverts and Figure B 7 to Figure B 10 for metal culverts.

From the development of this energy equation and Figure 3.7, H is the difference between the elevation of
the hydraulic grade line at the outlet and the energy line at the inlet. Since the velocity head in the entrance
pool usually is small when ponded conditions occur (V2/2g = 0), the water surface of the headwater pool
elevation can be assumed to equal the elevation of the energy line.

Figure 3.7: Determination of adopted outlet depth (ho)

HW H

D SoS
LSo
LS dhc TW

ho = Greater of hdcc +
+D D and TW
22
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Headwater depth under outlet control is calculated according to Equation 24:

𝐻𝑊 = 𝐻 + ℎ𝑜 − 𝐿𝑆𝑜 24

where

𝐻 = Total head (m) determined from Equation 23

ℎ𝑜 = Adopted outlet depth (m)

𝐿 = Length of culvert (m)

𝑆𝑜 = Slope of culvert barrel (m/m)

The various components of this equation are illustrated in Figure 3.7.

The adopted outlet height (ho) equals TW if TW > D, otherwise it is the greater of TW or Equation 25:

𝑑𝑐 +𝐷 25
TW or 2

where

𝑑𝑐 = Critical depth (m)

= Diameter or height of culvert (m)

Austroads 2023 | page 84


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 3.2: Culvert entry loss coefficient

Type of structure and design of entrance Coefficient ke

Concrete/fibre reinforced/poly pipe


Projecting from fill, socket end 0.2
Projecting from fill, square cut end 0.5
Headwall, with or without wingwalls:
Socket end 0.2
Rounded edge (radius = D/12) 0.2
Square edge 0.5
End section conforming to fill slope (precast end unit) 0.5
Mitred/cut to conform to fill slope (field cut) 0.7

Reinforced concrete box


Headwall parallel to embankment (no wingwalls):
Rounded on 3 edges (radius of 1/12 cell dimension) 0.2
Square on 3 edges 0.5
Wingwalls at 30° to 75° to cell: 0.5
Crown edge rounded (radius of 1/12 cell dimension) 0.2
Crown edge square 0.4
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Wingwalls at 10° to 30° to cell: square edged at crown 0.5


Wingwalls parallel (extension of sides) square edged at crown 0.7

Corrugated metal pipe


Headwall rounded edge 0.2
Headwall or headwall and wingwalls: square edged 0.5
End section conforming to fill slope (manufacturer end unit) 0.5
Mitred/cut to conform to fill slope 0.7
Projecting from fill (no headwall) 0.9

Notes:
The effect of wing walls reduces with multi-cell culverts.
For 3–6 cell culverts, assume entrance loss for wing walls 10° to 25° to barrel.
For culverts with more than 6 cells, assume wing walls parallel (extension of sides), regardless of actual wing walls.
Sources: Herr and Bossy (1965), Concrete Pipe Association of Australasia (2012), Schall et al. (2012).

3.9.2 Determination of Tailwater

The tailwater height is an important input to the culvert design process. Tailwater height (TW) can be
calculated using the method described in Section 2.3.

Design Procedures

The following procedure for standard culverts is acceptable for all but a very small percentage of culverts.

The procedure does not address the unsteady flow hydraulic effect of changing storage/ponding upstream
caused by the culvert/road embankment, which can modify the discharge through the culvert when flows
are changing significantly.

Austroads 2023 | page 85


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

‘Special’ culverts are those that do not fit the normal design procedure and these should be referred to
specialist hydraulic engineers.

The designer should be familiar with the theory and equations in the previous sections before using these
procedures. Following the design method without an understanding of culvert hydraulics can result in an
inadequate, unsafe or costly structure.

Because of the difficulty in determining whether a culvert will operate under inlet or outlet control, the
standard procedure for calculating the headwater height is to check both inlet and outlet control cases and
adopt the scenario that results in the higher headwater height.

3.10.1 Hydraulic Design

The standard culvert design procedure is illustrated in the flow chart in Figure 3.9 and the following sub-
sections align with this figure.

For this method, calculations should be recorded on a form similar to the one shown in Figure 3.8. The
following procedure provides direction in completing this form.

3.10.2 Collect Design Data

Further to Section 2.3 – Fundamentals of Open Channel Flow, the data to be collected/determined, and
then recorded in the design workings includes:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• required flood immunity (ARI)


• design discharge (Q), check discharge (if required) and extreme event discharge (if
available/applicable)
• tailwater height (TW), stream velocity (V) and Froude Number (Fr) for each discharge flow
• road shoulder height and any freeboard requirements
• maximum/allowable headwater height (AHW)
• proposed culvert slope (So)
• proposed culvert length (L)
• inlet/outlet invert heights
• maximum allowable stream velocity (Vmax) for outlet channel.

Austroads 2023 | page 86


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.8 Form for culvert design calculations


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Note: Tables and figures referenced in Figure 3.8 have been drawn from the same source below.
Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 87


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.9: Culvert design flow chart in steps 1 to 10

Collect Design Data


- Required flood immunity (ARI)
- Design discharge (Q) (also consider
A
extreme events).
- Stream velocity (V) and energy (Fr).
- Tailwater height (TW).
1 - Shoulder height and freeboard
requirements.
- Maximum / allowable headwater (AHW).
Determine Controlling Headwater

- Proposed culvert slope (So).


- Proposed culvert length (L).
6 Is HWi < HWo?
If yes - HWo controls - go to step 7.
No

- Inlet / outlet invert heights. If no - HWi controls - go to step 8.


- Maximum allowable velocity (Vmax).

Select a Trial Culvert


Determine an initial trial culvert waterway Outlet Velocity – Outlet Control
area using A=Q/Vmax

2
- If Vmax is unknown, use Vmax = 2.0 - 2.5
m/s.
Use area (A) to determine initial trial
7 Calculate outlet velocity using Vo=Q/A.
Where A is depth of flow based on D, dc or
TW as appropriate.
culvert(s).
- Height of culvert (D) should be approx.
TW.
- Size and fit culvert to channel / road.

Outlet Velocity – Inlet Control


Calculate outlet velocity using Vo=Q/A.
Design Discharge for Trials
For culverts, divide design discharge Q by
number of cells.
8 Use appropriate nomograph to determine

3 For box culverts, a ratio (Q/B) is also


required. Divide Q per cell by box width
part full area for pipes and for boxes, use
Manning’s to determine normal depth.

(B).
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Outlet Flow Energy (Froude’s Number)


Determine Inlet Control Headwater Depth
Use appropriate nomograph to determine
HW/D.
9 Determine Fr for flow at outlet.
Compare to Fr for channel – is there a
Now determine HWi. hydraulic jump?
YES
4 Check if HWi, > AHW?
- If yes, return to step 2 and select a larger
culvert.
- If no go to step 5.
Design Check
If Vo < Vmax then OK, if not, check that
outlet protection can be provided.
Determine Outlet Control Headwater
Depth
Select entrance loss coefficient ke.
10 Several hydraulically acceptable options
are possible – review costs to determine
required option.
Use appropriate nomograph to determine If an alternative culvert configuration is to
H. be elevated return to step 2.
Use appropriate nomograph for pipes /
formula for boxes to determine dc. If dc
exceeds D, then dc = D A waterway area of culvert
Determine ½ (dc + D). AHW allowable headwater level at inlet (m)
YES
5 Is TW > D at the outlet?
- If yes, use h0 = TW.
B
D
dc
width of culvert (m)
diameter (pipe) / height (box) of culvert (m)
critical depth of flow in culvert (m)
- If no, h0 is the larger of TW and ½ (dc +
D). Fr Froude’s Number
HWi generated headwater depth at inlet by Inlet control (m)
Determine length by slope, LSo. HWo generated headwater depth at inlet by Outlet control (m)
Determine HW0 = H + h0 – LS0 h0 adopted outlet depth (m)
ke entrance loss coefficient
Check if HW0 > AHW?
- If yes, return to step 2 and select a larger L length of culvert (m)
culvert. Q design discharge through culvert (m3/s)
- If no go to step 6. S0 slope of culvert
TW tailwater depth at outlet (m)
Vmax maximum average velocity in natural channel (m/s)
V0 calculated outlet velocity (m/s)
A
Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 88


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.10.3 Select a Trial Culvert

To select an initial trial culvert or culverts, first determine an initial trial culvert waterway area (A) using
(Equation 1):

𝐴 = 𝑄⁄𝑉
𝑚𝑎𝑥

where

𝑄 = Design discharge (m3/s)

𝑉𝑚𝑎𝑥 = Maximum allowable outlet velocity (m/s)

Maximum allowable outlet velocity should be based on site conditions or if no data is available, assume an
outlet velocity of 2.0 to 2.5 m/s depending on channel conditions.

Alternatively, if the allowable head loss (H) through the culvert is known (from the allowable afflux to limit
flooding height impacts on upstream development), then the initial trial culvert area may be estimated using
Equation 26:

𝑄 26
𝐴=
3.6 𝐻 0.5
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Choose culvert material, shape (pipe or box) and entrance type, allowing for minimum and maximum
allowable cover heights over the culvert.

Select a culvert trial size/configuration using the waterway area determined above. For example, the initial
trial culvert waterway area may have been determined as 1.25 m2. Review of product guides show that a
single barrel 900 mm reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) has a nominal diameter of 0.9 m and a waterway area
of 0.64 m2. Two barrels of 900 mm RCPs would have a waterway area of 1.27 m2, which is slightly larger
than the required waterway area and therefore suitable as an initial trial.

If possible, select a culvert size so that the obvert of the outlet is at, or just below, the tailwater height. This
ensures the probability of the culvert running full, which is usually desirable. This is not always practicable in
wide shallow flood plains, or in steep country. If the trial size is too large because of limited embankment
height or availability of size, multiple culverts may be used by dividing the discharge equally between the
number of cells used.

A further method is the use of culvert capacity charts (shown in Appendix D, Figure D 1 to Figure D 4), which
can be used to determine a preliminary culvert size and corresponding headwater depth for a known
discharge. To use these charts the value of L/(30So), where L is the culvert length (m) and So is the culvert
slope (m/m). The value of L/(30So) will dictate whether to adopt the inlet control line, outlet control line, or
interpolate between the two control lines drawn on the charts, to determine the headwater depth.

In locations where fauna passage is an issue, compare trial culvert size with the minimum fauna
requirements.

Several initial trial culverts of different size/configuration may be selected to start the design process.

3.10.4 Design Discharge for Trials

Where a single barrel culvert is not sufficient, multiple barrels or cells will be required and these
configurations constitute a parallel system.

Austroads 2023 | page 89


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Provided that all barrels of a multi-cell culvert are the same type, size and roughness (equal conveyance),
and also have the same invert levels/bed slope, flow will distribute evenly.

Design nomographs as shown in Appendix B and Appendix C, are based on a single barrel installation,
therefore divide the design discharge (Q) by the number of barrels for the trial culvert.

For boxes, a ratio (Q/B) is also required. This ratio is determined by dividing Q per cell by the nominal box
width (B).

Any proposed, multi-cell culvert that does not have all cells the same will require specialist advice as the
methodology presented in this Guide does not allow for these types of configurations. These culverts must
be referred to specialist hydraulic engineers.

3.10.5 Determine Inlet Control Headwater Depth

Using the trial culvert(s) from the previous section, find the HW/D value by use of the appropriate inlet control
nomograph (Appendix B, Figure B1 to Figure B4). In this case, tailwater conditions are to be neglected.
Three lines are presented in the nomographs for HW/D and the designer needs to select the appropriate line
based on:
• entrance type for pipe culverts
• wingwall flare angle for box culverts.

Headwater under inlet control conditions (HWi) is found by multiplying HW/D by the height of the culvert, D.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Check HWi against AHW and if HWi is greater (or much less) than AHW, try another size until HWi is
acceptable for inlet control before computing headwater for outlet control.

3.10.6 Determine Outlet Control Headwater Depth

Several steps are required to determine the headwater under outlet control conditions (HWo).

Firstly, determine the entrance loss coefficient, ke from Table 3.2.

Calculate the losses through the culvert, H, using the outlet control nomographs, Appendix B, Figure B 5 to
Figure B 10. In using these nomographs, some interpolation can be used for ke and L.

The next step is to determine the critical depth (dc) for the culvert. If dc exceeds D then take dc as D. For pipe
culverts, use nomographs as shown in Appendix C, Figure C 4 to Figure C 6 and for box culverts, use
Equation 27:

2⁄ 27
𝑄 3
𝑑𝑐 = 0.467 ( )
𝐵
where

𝑄 = 𝑄 per cell

Calculate (dc + D)/2.

Tailwater (TW) is required for determination of the next variable.

The next step is to establish the adopted outlet depth (ho) for design. Determine if TW > D:
• if yes, ho = TW
• if no, ho = the larger of TW and (dc + D)/2.

Austroads 2023 | page 90


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Multiply the proposed culvert length (L) and slope (So) to calculate LSo.

Headwater under outlet control conditions (HWo) is calculated using (Equation 24):

𝐻𝑊𝑜 = 𝐻 + ℎ𝑜 − 𝐿𝑆

Now check HWo against AHW and if HWo is greater than AHW, try another size until both HWi and HWo are
acceptable (< AHW).

3.10.7 Determine the Controlling Headwater

Compare the values of HWi and HWo. The higher headwater governs and indicates the flow control existing
under the given conditions for the trial size selected.
• if HWi > HWo the culvert is under inlet control and the controlling HW = HWi.
• if HWi < HWo the culvert is under outlet control and the controlling HW = HWo.

The controlling headway for trial should be clearly shown in design workings (i.e. design form).

There are now two checks that should be undertaken before completing trial design:
• If controlling HW is less than 1.2D, then the culvert is most likely not operating with a submerged inlet and
therefore may not be operating efficiently. Design should be revised using a different (slightly smaller)
culvert size/configuration.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• If controlling HW is less than 0.75D and the culvert is under outlet control, then the culvert may be flowing
only part-full and using (dc+D)/2 to calculate ho may not be giving accurate results. Design should be
revised using a different culvert size/configuration, where D ≈ TW.

Sometimes, calculations show HWi and HWo to be equal or nearly equal. In this instance, it is not clear
whether or not the culvert will perform under inlet control or outlet condition. In reality, the culvert could also
operate under both conditions (swap from one to the other) during the same rainfall event. Therefore, outlet
velocity calculations should be done for both inlet control and outlet control conditions with the higher velocity
(and associated control condition) being adopted.

3.10.8 Outlet Velocity – Outlet Control

The average outlet velocity for all culvert types can be calculated using (form of Equation 1):

𝑄⁄
𝑉𝑜 = 𝐴

where

𝑄 = Design discharge per culvert barrel/cell (m3/s)

𝐴 = Cross-sectional area of flow from culvert barrel/cell (m 2)

The cross-sectional area of flow (A) depends on the flow depth at the outlet.

Flow depth will be one of the following:


• critical depth (dc) if the tailwater is below critical depth
• tailwater depth (TW) if the tailwater is between critical depth and the top of the barrel
• the height of the barrel (D) if the tailwater is above the top of the barrel.

Austroads 2023 | page 91


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

See Figure 3.10 for guidance in determining the flow area for box culverts.

Figure 3.10: Flow area for box culverts

Determination of flow area for pipes is a little more difficult. The area can be determined using an approved
CADD package or calculated using Equation 28:

𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 𝜋𝑅 2 28

when

y = D

Or Equation 29:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 = 𝜋 𝑅 2 − 1⁄2 𝑅 2 (𝜃 − sin 𝜃) 29

where

𝑅 = Internal radius of pipe (m)

𝜃 = Angle in radians

Figure 3.11 provides guidance in determining the flow area for pipes.

Figure 3.11: Flow area for pipe culverts

See Appendix A – Method A, for an example of using Manning’s Equation to determine flow characteristics
for an existing channel to provide conditions for the design of a circular pipe.

Austroads 2023 | page 92


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.10.9 Outlet Velocity – Inlet Control

The average outlet velocity, Vo, for all culvert types can be calculated using (form of Equation 1):

𝑉𝑜 = 𝑄⁄𝐴

where

𝑄 = Design discharge per culvert barrel/cell (m3)

𝐴 = Cross-sectional area of flow from culvert barrel/cell (m 2)

The cross-sectional area of flow (A) depends on the flow depth at the outlet which can be approximated by
the normal depth of open-channel flow in the barrel, computed by Manning’s Equation for the discharge flow,
barrel size, roughness and slope of culvert selected.

Pipe culverts

For a pipe culvert, the culvert will not be flowing full at the outlet when under inlet control, meaning only a
part of the full waterway area will be used. To determine this ‘Part Area’, the designer needs to firstly
establish the relationship between ‘Full Flow’ (Qf) and ‘Part Flow’ (Qp) for the culvert trial where:
• ‘Part Flow’ (Qp) is the design discharge per cell
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• ‘Full Flow’ (Qf) is the capacity of the trial culvert and its velocity can be determined using Figure C 1.

Now determine the ratio Qp/Qf.

Using this ratio and Figure C 2 determine the percentage factors for velocity (Vo), depth of flow (y), area of
flow (A) and hydraulic radius (R).

Figure C 2 is used as follows:


• Step 1 – plot the Qp/Qf. ratio on the x-axis.
• Step 2 – draw a line up to the Discharge line.
• Step 3 – draw a line left and right to both edges (the left edge being the y-axis).
• Step 4 – read off ‘% Depth of Flow’ from the y-axis.
• Step 5 – drop lines to the x-axis from each intersect between the horizontal line drawn in Step 3 and the
Velocity, Area curves.
• Step 6 – read off % Values from the x-axis for each of these hydraulic elements.

Now draw a table as shown in Figure 3.12 and enter values as follows:
• A is Qf
• B is Qp
• C is the outlet velocity determined using Figure C 1
• D is the nominal diameter of pipe
• E is the waterway area of pipe
• F is the hydraulic element values determined using Figure C 2.

Austroads 2023 | page 93


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The remaining spaces of the table, including the determination of Vo, are calculated by multiplying the ‘Full’
values by the relevant ‘Factor’.

Figure 3.12: Full flow/part flow table

Variable Pipe full Applied factor Pipe part

Q A B

Vo C

y D F

A E

Source: DTMR (2010).

Box culverts

As for a pipe culvert, a box culvert will not be flowing full at the outlet when under inlet control. To determine
the normal flow conditions, depth (y) and velocity (Vo), use Manning’s Equation to develop a Modified Stage-
Discharge Curve for the culvert cell.

Using the Modified Stage-Discharge Curve, the flow depth (y) and outlet velocity (Vo) can be read directly.

See Appendix A – Method B, for an example of using Manning’s Equation to determine flow characteristics
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

for an existing channel to provide conditions for the design of a new culvert.

3.10.10 Outlet Flow Energy

To complete the hydraulic calculations for a trial culvert, the designer must determine Froude’s Number (Fr)
for the flow at the outlet. This is important as the designer can check this against Froude’s Number for the
channel flow and determine if a hydraulic jump will occur.

Froude’s Number can be determined using Equation 11:

𝐹𝑟 = 𝑄 √𝐵⁄(𝑔𝐴3 )

where B is derived from Equation 30:

𝐵 = 2√𝑦(𝐷 − 𝑦) 30

Figure 3.13 illustrates D, y and B.

Figure 3.13: Flow width in pipes

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 94


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

When a pipe or box culvert is flowing full, there is some pressure in the system and there is no water surface
(no B). Strictly, Froude’s Number does not apply, however for simplicity and that pressure is minimal, it is
considered suitable to calculate Fr at the moment just before the water surface touches the obvert of the
culvert and adopt this Fr value for the trial culvert. Therefore:
• for box culverts, use full waterway area and B = nominal width of box section
• for pipe culverts, use full waterway area, but assume B as 10% of D (≈ 99.7% of A).

3.10.11 Design Check

At this stage, the outlet velocity (Vo) should be checked against the maximum allowable stream velocity
(Vmax) for the outlet channel. Preferably, Vo should be less than Vmax. If Vo exceeds Vmax then the designer
must include suitable outlet protection for the culvert (see Section 3.5 – Culvert Size) if the trial is to be kept.
Where outlet protection is not suitable (size/cost/Vo > 5 m/s/Fr > 1.7) then a larger/wider culvert should be
trialled, or specialist advice/input obtained.

A worked example of the design steps, Section 3.10.2 – Collect Design Data to Section 3.10.11 – Design
Check, is shown in Section 3.15.1 – Example 1: Application of Culvert Design Procedure.

3.10.12 Practical Design

If a culvert trial design is considered unacceptable, the designer is required to redesign the culvert by trialling
another culvert size/configuration. The choices the designer has in determining a new trial culvert are:
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• add another barrel or cell if channel width permits


• increase barrel or cell height if vertical clearance permits
• alter culvert slope (Note: desirable minimum is 0.25%)
• a combination of the above.

Where a designer decides to alter invert heights, it is preferable to lower inlets and leave outlets as close to
the natural surface as possible. Drop inlets (and structures) are better than hanging or buried outlets.

Blockage of Culverts

The likelihood of blockage should be considered for all culverts. Blockage can occur through siltation or by
debris (such as vegetation). To assist in preventing and/or minimising blockage, the culvert grades should
match the stream grade.

During the times of flood, the water contains silt, vegetation and other debris from the catchment. The
designer should therefore consider the impacts on the effects of the culvert becoming blocked. Allowance for
blockage is commonly provided in the sizing of the culvert (see Section 3.7.4 – Siltation and Blockage).

Blockage reduces the waterway area of the culvert and therefore adversely affects the capacity/performance
of the culvert. The result of blockage is typically:
• an increase in upstream peak water heights/flooding
• an increased potential for water to overtop the road
• an increased risk of failure to the road embankment/culvert.

Silt deposits and some debris can be detected and removed during normal maintenance processes at times
outside of rainfall events and therefore these deposits/debris would not impede any flows; however the
effectiveness of this measure is highly dependent on the efficiency of maintenance in the area.

Austroads 2023 | page 95


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Where debris blockage during an event is considered likely (typical in catchments that contain significant
woody riparian vegetation), larger culvert sizes may be required, in accordance with the extent of adverse
impacts that could occur to the roadway or to surrounding properties.

Where large or long branches and/or tree trunks are a possibility, sloped extensions to piers, as shown in
Figure 3.14 can be used to ‘turn’ long objects into the culvert barrel.

Figure 3.14: Flood water flowing into box culverts


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Designers must consider the potential for and impacts of blockage for each catchment/culvert installation
and, where impacts are considered unacceptable, include appropriate mitigating treatments in the design.

Information on the calculation of blockage is located in AGRD Part 5 Section 3.7.

Consideration of Large or Extreme Events

Irrespective of the design ARI of a culvert, consideration should be given to the impacts of flood events which
are larger than the design event (see AGRD Part 5 – Section 4.9). In determining the appropriate degree of
consideration, issues such as the frequency and consequence of overtopping of the culvert should be
addressed.

Culvert Outlet Protection

Outlet protection is required in situations where:


• Outlet velocity exceeds the scour velocity of the bed or bank material.
• An unprotected channel bend exists within a short distance of the culvert outlet.
• The outlet channel and banks are actively eroding.
• If an erodible channel bank exists less than 10 to 13 times the pipe diameter downstream of the outlet
and this bank is in line with the outlet jet (i.e. likely to be eroded by the outlet jet), the bank should be
adequately protected to control any undesirable damage as a result of the outlet jetting.

Austroads 2023 | page 96


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The most appropriate outlet protection is determined by considering the hydraulic performance of the outlet
in the prevailing stream environment.

At outlet structures, the best hydraulic performance is obtained when the confining sidewalls are parallel and
the distribution of flow across the channel is uniform.

Culverts, however, are generally narrower than the natural waterway and a transition section is required to
return the flow to the natural channel. When culvert outlet velocities are high, additional measures at the
outlets may prove to be necessary for energy dissipation. Section 3.15 – Worked Examples provides
additional information on the more specialised energy dissipators.

To check whether standard inlet and outlet structures with headwalls, wingwalls, aprons and cut-off walls are
adequate, the outlet velocity for the culvert requires examination with respect to:
• natural environment (soil and vegetation cover)
• size of peak flow
• duration of large flows.

If outlet velocities exceed the acceptable limits, it may be necessary to check for potential bed scour
problems.

The key design parameters for sizing the culvert outlet protection are the average rock size (d50) and the
length of rock protection (L).
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

For a single pipe outlet protection the recommended minimum rock size (d50) and length (L) of rock
protection downstream of culvert outlets may be determined from Figure 3.15. The length of an extended
concrete apron can be determined in the same way as for a rock apron. When the tailwater is less than one-
half of the pipe diameter (D), the minimum rock length should be adequate. When the tailwater is between
D/2 and D, energy dissipation decreases and the length of the protection needs to be extended by twice the
minimum length. The minimum recommended width of the protection can be determined using Figure 3.16.

For multi-pipe outlets, the energy generated is higher than for single pipe outlets and the recommended
minimum rock size (d50) and length (L) of the rock protection can be determined from Figure 3.17. The rock
pad length should be doubled if it is required to minimise the risk to scour downstream of the culvert outlet.
The multi-pipe outlet protection is a rectangular shape with the minimum recommended width of protection
being the width of the pipe outlets plus 0.6 m.

When the width of the channel is less than the recommended width of the rock protection, then the rock
protection shall extend up the banks of the channel to a height equal to the obvert of the outlet.

The depth of the rock apron should be twice the size of rock used for the apron.

For Froude Number (Fr) values greater than 1.7 and outlet velocities equal to or greater than 5.0 m/s, an
alternative energy dissipator structure should be considered.

Austroads 2023 | page 97


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.15: Single pipe outlet minimum rock size and length of apron
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: Catchments and Creeks (2011).

Figure 3.16: Rock apron detail for single pipe outlet

L
La

La/5

B Width of apron

1 La/5
5

Austroads 2023 | page 98


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.17: Minimum rock size and length of apron for a multi-pipe outlet
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Note: The pipe diameter is for a single pipe diameter of the multi-pipe outlet, e.g. for an outlet of 2 x 1200 mm pipes, use
a pipe diameter of 1200 mm.
Source: Catchments and Creeks (2011).

A worked example of to determine the dimensions of a rock apron is shown in Section 3.15.2 – Example 2:
Culvert Outlet Protection Example.

Culvert End Treatments

3.14.1 General

Culvert end treatments, which include wingwalls, cut-off walls and anchorages, and erosion control
measures, may be required to perform one or more of the following functions:
• prevent fill from encroaching on the culvert opening
• prevent erosion of the fill and adjacent channel
• prevent undermining of culvert ends
• help anchor the structure to the ground
• inhibit seepage and piping through the bedding and backfill
• meet traffic safety requirements
• improve the appearance of large culverts
• resist hydraulic uplift forces on corrugated metal pipe culverts
• strengthen the ends of large flexible culverts, especially those with mitred or skewed ends.

Austroads 2023 | page 99


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Cut-off walls in the form of a vertical wall constructed below the end, or outside edge, of the apron of a
culvert must always be provided at culvert inlets and outlets to prevent undermining and piping failure. For
corrugated metal pipe culverts, the cut-off walls also act to counteract uplift at the culvert inlet.

The treatments at culvert endwalls are a compromise between hydraulic efficiency, traffic safety, and
economy. A flared approach with rounded edges at the pipe entry is the best hydraulic inlet, but such inlets
are too costly for small pipes.

As the size of the culvert increases, protection at the endwall as described in AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.7.6, is
needed. Culvert ends mitred to conform to the fill slope for safety reasons, have higher entry losses than
square headwalls (see Table 3.2) and therefore the headwater depths should be increased accordingly.

Outlet structures should prevent scour damage to the road embankment, the downstream channel and
adjacent property; as well as retaining the road filling and supporting the end of the culvert.

Treatments of culverts to improve roadside safety are discussed in AGRD Part 6 (Austroads 2022) which
covers provision of roadside barriers across culverts.

3.14.2 Slope Faced

The ends of small culverts that run parallel to the road (e.g. under driveways) should be treated with either a
sloped end, or sloped end with grate, depending on the road agency requirements, to improve roadside
safety for errant vehicles.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Depending on road agency requirements, culverts that carry water under the road should either be extended,
so that the end wall is further from the road, e.g. beyond the clear zone, or have sloped ends that match the
batter slope. Larger culverts may require a grate to be fitted to protect the public. Designers should see
AGRD Part 3 (Austroads 2016) and AGRD Part 6 (Austroads 2022) for further information.

3.14.3 Traversable Endwalls

Figure 3.18 shows an example of a traversable end wall for pipes or box culverts up to 1000 mm in diameter
or height. The treatment has rails fitted to prevent errant vehicles approaching the culvert end-on from
snagging a vertical headwall. It is important to note that these end treatments can affect hydraulic
performance and increase maintenance difficulty.

Austroads 2023 | page 100


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.18: Example of a slope faced and slope faced with grate culvert endwall
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: VicRoads (1998).

Worked Examples

3.15.1 Example 1: Application of Culvert Design Procedure

This example describes a culvert design procedure for a road crossing of a small channel (see Figure 3.19),
based on the following requirements and data:

Design discharge (Q) is 6.25 m3/s for a 50 year ARI event.

Figure 3.19: Channel cross-section

Channel slope = 0.65%


Maximum stream velocity = 2.5 m/s

Side slopes = 1:1 n = 0.06

Channel bed = 5 m
Tailwater has been determined as 0.96 m
Source: DTMR (2010). Channel cross-section

Austroads 2023 | page 101


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.20: Road cross-section for worked example

5m

Ht = 125.65 m

Pavement thickness
Freeboard = 100 mm = 460 mm

3
Q50 = 6.25 m /s

RCP culvert Outlet invert


Ht. = 123.85 m Ht. = 123.75 m
Culvert length = 15.6 m

Source: DTMR (2010). Road cross-section

This example can be solved following the design procedure described in Section 3.10 – Design Procedures.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Reference should also be made to Figure 3.9 – Culvert design flow chart.

Step 1 – Collect design data

Use the hydraulic calculation form (Figure 3.8) and fill out the known information.

The shoulder height can be calculated based on the centreline height, road crossfall and traffic lane width.

Shoulder height = Centreline height – road crossfall

= 125.65 m – 5 m x 3%

= 125.5 m

A 100 mm freeboard below shoulder height is required, therefore the Allowable Headwater depth (AHW) will
be:

AHW = Shoulder height – invert height at outlet – freeboard

AHW = 125.50 – 123.85 – 0.100 = 1.55 m

The tailwater depth can be obtained from the Stage-Discharge curve shown in Figure 3.21 below. For details
on how to determine a Stage-Discharge curve see Section 2.3 – Fundamentals of Open Channel flow.

Austroads 2023 | page 102


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.21: Stage-Discharge curve for culvert design example

Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Complete top section of the design form as follows:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Figure 3.22: Geometric detail of key parameters for worked example

Step 2 – Select a trial culvert (see Section 3.10.3 – Select a Trial Culvert)

Firstly, determine an indicative waterway area of culvert(s) based on Q and maximum allowable velocity.

A = Q/V

= 6.25/2.5

= 2.50 m2

Use area to select an initial culvert configuration that meets the area required. Size and fit the culvert to the
channel/road.

At this stage, and based on preliminary considerations given above, a RCP Culvert ≥ 1200 will not fit as the
height of the barrel will be within the pavement. That is:
• Maximum barrel height = 125.5 – 0.460 – 123.85 = 1.19 m
• Initial trial size selection area = 2.50 m2
• Try 3/1050 RCP, Area = 2.60 m2 (Check pipe OD ≤ 1.19 – OK).

Austroads 2023 | page 103


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 3 – Design discharge for trials (see Section 3.10.4 – Design Discharge for Trials)

For multiple cells culvert determine Q per cell:

Q per cell = 6.25/3 = 2.08 m3/s

Step 4 – Determine inlet control headwater depth (see Section 3.10.5 – Determine Inlet Control
Headwater Depth)
• Analyse the culvert assuming inlet control.
• Use the nomograph Figure B 2 to determine HW/D and then calculate HWi.
• Q = 2.08 m3/2, D = 1050 mm, from nomograph, HW/D = 1.33.
• HWi = HW/D x D = 1.33 x 1.05 = HWi = 1.40 m < AHW (1.55 m).

Step 5 – Determine outlet control headwater depth (see Section 3.10.6 – Determine Outlet Control
Headwater Depth)

Analyse the culvert assuming outlet control.


• Select the entrance loss coefficient in accordance with the project description (see Figure 3.20) above.
The culvert entrance type is a square edge with headwall, therefore
ke = 0.5 (see Table 3.2).
• Determine head (H) for RCP culvert flowing full from Figure B 6.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• Plot L = 15.6 m on ke = 0.5, plot D = 1050 and draw line.


• Locate pivot on turning line.
• Plot Q = 2.08 m3/s and draw line crossing pivot on turning line to Head line.
• Read H = 0.50 m.
• Determine the critical depth in a pipe, dc from the nomograph Figure B 6.
• dc = 0.81 m.
• Calculate (dc + D)/2 = (0.81 + 1.05)/2 = 0.93 m.
• Determine the tailwater. TW was earlier determined as 0.96 m (Figure 3.21).
• Determine ho, which is the greater of TW and (dc + D)/2, therefore ho = 0.96 m.
• Calculate length x slope = 15.6 m x 0.0065 m/m = 0.101 m.
• Determine HWO = H + ho – LSo = 0.5 + 0.96 – 0.101 = HWO = 1.36 m < AHW (1.55 m).

Step 6 – Determine the controlling headwater (HW) (see Section 3.10.7 – Determine the Controlling
Headwater)
• The controlling headwater is determined from the larger of HWi = 1.40 m and HWO = 1.36 m
• Therefore, the three 1050 mm diameter RCP pipe culverts are operating under inlet control.

Austroads 2023 | page 104


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 7 – Calculate outlet velocity – inlet control pipe (see Section 3.10.9 – Outlet Velocity – Outlet
control)
• Determine relationship of part full pipe (Qp) and full flow pipe (Qf) = (Qp/Qf).
• Using the nomograph in Figure C 1, Qf = 2.4 m3/s and Vf = 2.5 m/s.
• Qp/Qf = 2.08/2.4 = 87%.
• Using the nomograph in Figure C 2 obtain the following factors:
– 71.5% depth of flow, therefore y = 1.05 x 71.5% = 0.75 m
– 77% waterway area, therefore A = 0.87 m2 x 77% = 0.67 m2
– 112% outlet velocity, therefore V = 2.75 x 112% = 3.08 m/s.

This work can be tabulated as follows (see Figure 3.12):

Variable Full flow Factor Part flow


Q 2.40 – 2.08
V 2.75 1.12 3.08
Y 1.05 0.715 0.75
A 0.867 0.77 0.67

Step 8 – Calculate outlet flow energy


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Calculate the Froude Number (Fr) (Equation 11):


𝑉𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑙𝑒𝑡
𝐹𝑟 =
√𝑔(𝐴⁄𝐵)

In order to calculate the Froude Number, calculate B (top width of flow) using Equation 30:

𝐵 = 2 √𝑦 ( 𝐷 − 𝑦)

where

𝑦 = depth flow = 0.715 x 1.05 = 0.75 m

𝐵 = 2 x √(0.75 x (1.05 – 0.75))

𝐵 = 0.95 m

Therefore:
3.08
𝐹𝑟 = = 1.17 (supercritical flow)
√9.81 (0.67⁄0.95)

Since Fr < 1.7 a rock pad will be suitable.

Step 9 – Design check (see Section 3.10.11)

The outlet velocity = 3.08 m/s and is therefore greater than allowable stream velocity = 2.5 m/s. It is
recommended that a suitable type of erosion control measure be determined.

Austroads 2023 | page 105


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.23: Worksheet for example culvert design


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 106


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

3.15.2 Example 2: Culvert Outlet Protection

See Section 3.13 – Culvert Outlet Protection for information on culvert outlet protection.

The following example demonstrates the procedure to determine the dimensions of a rock apron required to
provide outlet protection against outlet velocities that are higher than acceptable.

For velocities in excess of 5 m/s, the use of energy dissipators should be considered and specialist advice
should be acquired.

This example will demonstrate the design of an erosion control measure for a 1200 mm diameter RCPs (inlet
control) that have been designed to convey a total discharge of 2.25 m3/s. The maximum allowable stream
velocity for the channel is 2.0 m/s. The depth and velocity at the outlet are 64% of the depth of full flow and
2.97 m/s (per cell) respectively.

Step 1

First determine a suitable type of control measure by calculating the Froude Number Equation 11:

𝑉
𝐹𝑟 =
√𝑔(𝐴⁄𝐵)

In order to calculate the Froude Number, it is necessary to calculate area of flow at the outlet (Ao) and the top
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

width of flow (B).


• Ao = Q/Vo
• Ao = 2.25/2.97
• Ao = 0.76 m2.

Using Equation 30:

𝐵 = 2 √𝑦 ( 𝑑 − 𝑦)

where

𝑦 = 64% depth of full flow = 0.4 x 1.2 = 0.77 m

𝐵 = 2 √0.77 (1.2 − 0.77) = 1.15 m

2.97
= 1.16
𝐹𝑟 =
√9.81(0.76⁄1.15)

Since 𝐹𝑟 < 1.7, a rock pad will be suitable

Austroads 2023 | page 107


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 2

Determine stone size and length of protection from Figure 3.24 as shown below:

Figure 3.24: Application of Figure 3.15 to worked example

2.97
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

1200

Source: Adapted from Catchments and Creeks (2011).

From Figure 3.24 above:


• Length = 4D = 4 x 1.2 = 4.8 m. If the tailwater was between D/2 and D, the length should be doubled.
Therefore, the recommended length = 4.8 m x 2 = 9.6 m. (Adopted for this example).
• Also, from Figure 3.24, the stone size required, d50 = 300 mm.

Step 3

Determine rock apron dimensions based on a 5:1 expansion ratio. See Figure 3.25.

The outside edge of the normal concrete apron will extend 1.8 m beyond the outlet with a 30° wingwall flare.
The overall width between the wingwalls is therefore= 1.2 + 2(1.8 x tan 30°) = 3.3 m.

The width of the rock apron at its downstream extremity, at a 5:1 expansion ratio is therefore
= 3.3 + 2 (9.6/5) = 7.1 m. See Figure 3.25.

Austroads 2023 | page 108


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 3.25: Solution to example for culvert outlet protection

L = 11.4 m
La = 9.6 m

9.6/5

B = 1.2 m 3.3 m 7.1 m

9.6/5
1
5
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 109


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Floodway Crossings

Introduction

A floodway is defined as those areas of the floodplain where a significant discharge of water occurs during
floods. They are often aligned with naturally defined channels. Floodways are the areas that, even if only
partially blocked, would cause a significant redistribution of flood flow, or a significant increase in flood height
(NSW Department of Environment and Climate Change, 2007). Roads can cross floodways using bridges,
culverts and floodway crossings, the method of crossing depending on the degree of flood immunity
required.

A floodway crossing consists of a length of pavement on a typically level grade that is designed to be
overtopped by floodwater during relatively high annual exceedance probability (AEP) floods i.e., frequently.
Sections of road likely to be overtopped frequently should also be designed as a floodway crossing. The
objective of a floodway crossing is to provide for floodwater to be conveyed across the road under controlled
conditions at designated places which are specifically designed and protected to minimise damage to the
road asset and to the environment.

The importance of the proper design of a floodway crossing is captured in the following quote from IPWEA:
“The frequency of flood events and the impact on communities is forecast to increase.
Flood related hydrological disasters have the highest occurrence rate of all natural
disasters worldwide causing significant economic loss. Road structures such as floodway
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

crossings, culverts and bridges frequently sustain damage and/or catastrophic failure as a
direct result of flood waters. These structures are vital in post disaster recovery and need
to be designed in a manner that allows them to remain open and serviceable during and
after extreme flood events”.

A floodway crossing results from a decision that a culvert or a bridge is not an appropriate or affordable
drainage solution at a specific site. The decision to provide a floodway crossing should be supported by
adequate consideration of alternatives.

Inundated floodway crossings successfully performing their designed function is shown in Figure 4.1.

Figure 4.1: Functioning floodway crossings

Floodway crossings must be identified by advance warning signs, and by water depth markers along the
floodway crossing. The importance of providing appropriate signage that gives adequate advice of risks to
driving through the floodway crossing when inundated cannot be underestimated. The issue is that both
designers and road users often grossly underestimate the volume and velocity of flood water.

Austroads 2023 | page 110


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Floodway Crossings are commonly used in rural roadways where:


• traffic volumes are relatively low
• the cost of a bridge or culvert is too high to justify when compared against other priorities and network
deficiencies
• some interruption to access is acceptable
• flooding is infrequent or of short duration
• in appropriate circumstances, as a means of protecting large culverts or a bridge from being damaged
during above-design flood conditions.

4.1.1 Design Parameters/Criteria

The planning for the floodway crossing must be in accord with the requirements of the strategy for that road
link as set by the relevant Authority. The strategy should include:
• Hydraulics – determine (also see Section 4.2.10):
– Flood immunity required in terms of the probability that a specified event (that is, rainfall or discharge)
will be exceeded. Flood immunity is specified in terms of either an AEP or a number of Exceedances
per Year (EY). The AEP, expressed as a percentage, is defined as ‘the probability that a given
condition, such as rainfall total accumulated over a given duration or flow rate, will be exceeded in any
one year’.
– The maximum time of closure (ToC) to be adopted in any single event. (Floodway crossings will
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

generally have a low flood immunity but should have short periods of closure depending on the
importance of the road link).
– The road height required to provide the required level of access and trafficability for the chosen design
AEP. The floodway crossing may require costly batter protection and therefore a higher road together
with a larger culvert or bridge option may be more cost effective.
– Culvert(s) required – should be of a size and location such that the culvert will run full before water
flows over the road (Figure 4.2).
– Requirement for anti-ponding culvert(s) – placed at the low point of the natural surface to take the
perennial flows under the road. Note that these relatively smaller relieving culverts may be prone to
blockage by debris.
• Socio economic impacts in times of inundation - consider:
– The economic effects on the local economy.
– The social and safety impacts on the community e.g., access to local medical services, schools,
places of work, shops, general access and mobility issues, medical and other emergencies.
– Reliability of access for recovery after natural events such as cyclones.
• Safety impacts in and after times of inundation - consider:
– Vehicle crashes, medical and other emergencies, especially where alternative routes or transport
modes do not exist in the area.
– Recovery from natural events such as cyclones, storms and fires.
• Environmental considerations (also see Section 4.2.9):
– The effect of afflux in relation to impacts on neighbouring properties.
• Geotechnical considerations:
– Resistance to erosion, stability of banks of the waterway.
– Resistance to erosion of the natural ground where floodway crossing protection is required.

Austroads 2023 | page 111


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• Road function considerations:


– Emergency services.
– Transportation of goods and services.
– Connectivity within the road network.
– Proximity to and flood immunity of alternative routes.

Figure 4.2: Example of water flowing over the floodway crossing before the culverts are running full
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Design Considerations

4.2.1 General

All roads subject to inundation during their life should be designed to cater for flood flows overtopping the
road irrespective of the road being above a 1% AEP flood. Obviously, there is an upper limit to affordability,
but for example, flat batters do more than just improve safety and reduce the need for crash barriers.

Note that a road designed with than an immunity of 1% AEP has a 50% chance of being flooded once over
70 years and a 15.6% chance of being flooded twice over 70 years (refer to “Understanding Floods:
Questions and Answers”: Queensland Government 2011). There is therefore good reason to consider the
impact of such overtopping and provide design features to minimise the potential damage that could result.

A floodway crossing with an immunity of 10% AEP or less also has to withstand many much larger floods
during its life, so it needs to be very resilient to huge floods. This becomes problematic on big streams with
mobile stream beds where a low or medium height bridge may prove to be a more appropriate solution than
culverts.

Design requirements:
• Hydraulic design to ensure that there is sufficient discharge capacity to safely convey the design flow at
the designed depth and flow velocity, thus ensuring the safety of road users (e.g., against washouts) and
keeping maintenance at an acceptable level.
• Appropriate pavement design to resist the adverse effects of submergence and high flow velocity.
• Floodway crossing failures come in many forms some examples of these failures are shown in Figure 4.3
• Providing appropriate protection on the road approaches to floodway crossings as initial failures may
occur in these areas (see Figure 4.3 (a)).

Austroads 2023 | page 112


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• Providing appropriate protection to the floodway crossing road approaches along the upstream side of the
embankment to prevent:
– Undermining of the floodway crossing structure (see Figure 4.3 (b)).
– Breaches in the floodway crossing adjacent to major structures (see Figure 4.3 (c)).
• Providing adequate embankment protection against scouring to ensure the stability of the floodway
crossing.
• Upstream flooding and pondage.
• Providing road signage and road delineation, see AS 1742.2.

Figure 4.3: Floodway crossing failures

(a) (b)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

(c) (d)

4.2.2 Culvert Dimensions and Design Considerations for Culverts under the Floodway Crossing

The proposed drainage structures at each site will need to be designed to account for the hydraulic jump of
water passing over the crossing or risk undermining from the downstream side.
• The culverts should be aligned parallel with the waterway channel, not perpendicular to the road.
• Multiple banks of culverts are recommended at each site to:
– Maintain the transport of sediment.
– Account for the likely frequent (during high flows) reconfiguration of the channel bed and movement of
the low flow channel.
– Reduce the likelihood of blockage.

Austroads 2023 | page 113


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• Generally, box culverts should be constructed in lieu of pipe culverts to better support the transportation
of debris and sediment through the structure. This requires them to be placed at a depth and with
provisions to ensure scour does not undermine them.
• Appropriate bed and bank stabilisation work should be incorporated into the design to minimise damage
and/or failure during high flow events associated with overtopping and outflanking. Rock riprap is
generally considered the most effective method of stabilisation. Wire mattresses and gabions could be
considered as suitable alternatives depending on site circumstances.
• Riprap involves the controlled placement of quarried, angular rock against a stream bed and/or bank to
prevent further erosion of the bank in the medium term. Formally designed rock protection involves
undertaking hydraulic calculations to determine an appropriate rock size to ensure that the rock will not be
washed away. The rock is also graded and placed to a design thickness to ensure that it forms an
interlocking mass.
• Where high energy hydraulic conditions are expected, rock size is likely to be very large and potentially
not feasible for some events. In this case the maximum feasible rock size should be used, and
maintenance will be required.
• General design requirements for rock riprap work are summarised as follows:
– Rock used for the works shall be hard, durable, well graded, and angular in shape, free from cracks,
overburden, shale and organic matter.
– Each case will have to be designed for the specific circumstance applying to that site and the
appropriate size of rock can be determined. Commonly, the D50 of the rock will need to be 350 -
450mm. (By definition 50% of the mass shall consist of stones with an equivalent spherical diameter
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

equal to or larger than this dimension).


– Rock protection shall have a minimum thickness of twice the median diameter (D50) of the rock
material.
– The finished rock protection shall be fully keyed into the bed and banks of the river and not left proud
of the riverbed and banks.
– The rock should be placed on the bank rather than tipped down the batter (batters not steeper than 1
on 3).
– Some settlement of the rock may require the placement of additional material on the slope.
• Where floodway crossing length permits, floodway crossings should have at least two sets (banks) of
culverts at opposite ends of the floodway crossing to allow for the natural changes in the bed alignment
as it meanders over time (see Figure 4.4).

Figure 4.4: Floodway crossings with two sets of culverts both in line with the flow

Austroads 2023 | page 114


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.2.3 General Safety

The geometric design of the floodway crossing, and its approaches must be such as to provide a safe
roadway for users. The risk of vehicles being washed off floodway crossings is an important consideration.
Water flowing over the crossing may induce floating instability or sliding instability depending on the depth
and velocity of the water and the characteristics of the vehicle. For small passenger vehicles, floatation
becomes an issue in still water of 300mm depth, and at 100mm depth for a flow velocity of 3.0m/s. Closure
of the road may be required when the flooding depth reaches the point of instability for the most vulnerable
vehicle using the road – in most cases, small passenger vehicles. Guidance can be obtained in Australian
Rainfall and Runoff: A Guide to Flood Estimation, Book 6, Section 7.2.4 – Vehicle Stability (Ball et al, 2019).
The policy of the relevant jurisdiction on road closures due to flooding must be consulted.

The flows over the floodway crossing should also be assessed for suitability for people who may attempt to
traverse the flow on foot (e.g. vehicle occupants leaving their vehicle) and guidance on criteria can be
obtained in Australian Rainfall and Runoff: A Guide to Flood Estimation, Book 6, Section 7.2.3 – People
Stability (Ball et al, 2019).

It is important to consider conditions for both flooded and dry conditions. The driver must be able to traverse
the road safely at the operating speed when the road is clear of floodwater; and must have sufficient time
and information to take the appropriate action when water is across the road. The consequences of wrong
decisions by drivers because of inadequate and/or misleading information can be severe – examples are
shown in Figure 4.5.

Figure 4.5: Results of poor driver assessment on entering the floodway crossing
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Where rock riprap is used to protect batters, the effect of the rock size on roadside safety must be
considered. Large protruding rocks offer a significant hazard to an errant vehicle. Rock diameters greater
than 200mm are considered to be an unacceptable safety risk. The common rock size used (refer to Section
4.2.2) is considered a hazard and appropriate roadside protection for vehicles would be required.

4.2.4 Sight Distance

It is important that adequate approach sight distance be provided to allow drivers time to recognise water
over the road and to stop on a wet road. It is important that drivers can see the presence of water on the
road and the sight distance should be checked to ensure that stopping distance is achieved to the height of
the water surface at a depth of 150mm. For short floodway crossings, the driver should be able to see a
length of water equivalent to at least 1sec of travel at the design speed. This may determine the minimum
length permissible.

In addition, a driver must be able to see any washout in the floodway crossing after the water has subsided
and be able to stop before reaching it. An object height of zero should be used in determining the
appropriate stopping sight distance to account for this.

Headlight sight distance should also be achieved to an object height of zero to ensure that the driver is
alerted to the presence of water on the road, and to detect washouts.

Austroads 2023 | page 115


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.2.5 Horizontal Alignment

The horizontal alignment of the approaches to floodway crossings should be designed in accordance with
Austroads Guide to Road Design Part 3 (AGRD Part 3) with the following modifications:
• Desirably, the floodway crossing itself should not be placed on a horizontal curve because:
– There are problems in defining the edge of the pavement for motorists.
– Any superelevation may change the normal flow distribution i.e. push more water to the non-
superelevated sections of road.
– The water depth will be deeper on one side of the road than on the other due to superelevation and
there is a possibility of the high side being trafficable when the low side is not, thus creating a safety
problem.
– This can result in lateral depth variations and surface debris on the floodway crossing surface that can
compromise safety. Residual silt and gravel on floodway crossings after isolated rainfall events can
result in a hazardous surface and cause serious injury to vehicle occupants. It is imperative that new
floodway crossings are designed to minimise this risk and establish effective maintenance programs to
remove debris and gravel from floodway crossings.
• All superelevation on a curve approaching the floodway crossing must be completed before the start of
the floodway crossing (tangent point of the first vertical curve). Additionally, the curvature of the
approach road may reduce the visibility of the floodway crossing, especially at night.
• Where a floodway crossing must be located on a curve with superelevation, crossfalls should remain
consistent across the floodway crossing to avoid unexpected changes in depth of water along the
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

floodway crossing.
• Horizontal sight distance to water on the floodway crossing must be in accordance with the requirements
in Section 4.2.4.

4.2.6 Vertical Alignment

The vertical alignment of a floodway crossing is determined by:


• Hydraulic capacity.
• Geometric road design standards.
• Vehicle safety.
• Effect of backwater upon land use.
• Structural stability.

The longitudinal grade on the approach to floodway crossings must be carefully designed to:
• Avoid discomfort to the occupants of vehicles.
• Provide stopping sight distance to the surface of the water in a short floodway crossing (refer to the
required conditions in Section 4.2.4).
• Ensure that drivers are not misled regarding the extent and depth of water over the floodway crossing.

The vertical curves should be designed in accordance with the comfort criteria described in AGRD Part 3,
while ensuring that the visibility provided meets the criteria set out in Section 4.2.4.

Austroads 2023 | page 116


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Floodway Crossings should be designed with a horizontal longitudinal profile (except for the sag curves to
the approach ramps) so that the depth of water over the road is as uniform as possible over the flooded
section. The longitudinal gradient of the central part of the floodway crossing must therefore be level so that
it acts as a weir and the possibility of a driver unexpectedly encountering deeper water, and possibly stalling
or being swept downstream is avoided. (An exception to this is a skew crossing of a major stream, where the
natural stream grade must be estimated and applied in proportion to the flood crossing to avoid variations in
flow depth over the length of the floodway crossing.)

It is also essential to avoid more than one height in a floodway crossing. That is, once the driver has entered
the floodway crossing with water across it, there must be no deeper water at some point further along the
floodway crossing. This type of design is misleading to drivers and can result in a dangerous situation.

Exceptions to the level grading may occur where bridges have been built significantly higher than the flooded
approaches on both sides. The bridges have been built on the basis that the approaches will be raised
sometime in the future.

In flat terrain, the presence of the floodway crossing must be obvious to the driver and a relatively short,
sharp entrance to the floodway crossing section (within the comfort criterion) should be provided with
appropriate signage. Figure 4.6 shows the general type of longitudinal section for a floodway crossing in flat
terrain. Details of the appropriate approach grading to floodway crossings are given in Figure 4.7 and Figure
4.8.

Figure 4.6: Typical longitudinal section of floodway crossing in flat terrain


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The length of floodway crossings should be limited to about 300 m, so that drivers do not become
disorientated when confronted with wide, open stretches of water. Where wide flood sections must be
crossed, floodway crossings should be broken into shorter lengths by the provision of sections of road that
are raised above the maximum flood height. However, care should be taken to avoid the creation of isolated
islands. The level of serviceability must be the same on both sides of the “island”. The use of such raised
“islands” could result in vehicles being trapped while crossing during rising flood heights.

Crest curves should be designed to provide for adequate visibility in accordance with the criteria set out in
Section 4.2.4.

Sag vertical curves should be kept short in order not to encroach on the waterway in the floodway crossing
depression and not to increase the raised portion of the ramp more than is strictly necessary. The comfort
criterion will apply. Additionally, the vertical grading must not create a hidden dip when the road is not
flooded.

Austroads 2023 | page 117


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.7: Typical details of grading for standard floodway crossings

Source: Queensland Department of Transport and Main Roads


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Figure 4.8: Typical details of grading of standard floodway crossings in low formations

Source: Queensland Department of Transport and Main Roads

4.2.7 Cross Section

The width of the floodway crossing formation will depend on the width of the approach road and should
match that width but should not be less than 8.0m on existing low trafficked roads.

Austroads 2023 | page 118


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Width Range

Long Floodway Crossings: The following points refer to floodway crossings comprising more than an
isolated dip (the usual case of a floodway crossing taking flood channel flows). Note that details of the cross
section also include the shoulder protection required.
• The general minimum formation width should be 8.6m, with some relaxation possible on roads under
150 vpd.
• The general maximum formation width should be 10.0m, unless the additional costs of achieving full
formation width are not significant.
• The minimum shoulder protection should be 1.0m.
• The maximum shoulder protection should be 1.5m.
• The balance between pavement widening and shoulder width should be determined by local conditions.
In the general case where shoulder protection is more expensive than paving material, the shoulder
would tend to the lower limit. In more remote areas where paving material can be more expensive than an
“adequate” material for cement treated shoulders, the shoulder would tend to the upper limit.

Table 4.1 shows typical floodway crossing width requirements which meet these requirements and shows
the range of widths related to typical pavement and shoulder designs.

Table 4.1: Typical floodway crossing width requirements

Pavement Width Shoulder width Formation width Floodway crossing (m)


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

(m) (m) (m) Elementary widths Total width


4.0 2.5 9.0 7.0+(2x1.0) to 9.0
7.0+(2x0.8) 8.61
6.0 1.5 9.0 7.0+(2x1.0) 9.0
6.0 2.0 10.0 7.0+(2x1.5) to 10.0
8.0+(2x1.0) 10.0
6.5 1.5 9.0 8.0+(2x0.5) 9.0
6.5 2.5 11.5 8.0+(2x1.0) 10.02
7.0 2.0 11.0 8.0+(2x1.0) 10.02
7.0 2.5 12.0 8.0+(2x1.0) 10.02
1 The general minimum formation width is 8.6m. However, on lightly trafficked roads (<150vpd), this width may be
reduced to 7.4 to 8.0m with approval from the designated authority.
2 The general maximum is 10.0m. However, where the cost of maintaining the larger width across the floodway
crossing is not excessive, the full width may be adopted with approval from the designated authority.

Source: Queensland Department of Transport and Main Roads

Short Floodway Crossings: Where the floodway crossing is short and confined to a main flow channel,
especially where sight distance is close to the minimum for the operating speed of the road, consideration
should be given to providing a full formation width floodway crossing rather than the widths in Table 4.1.

Overtaking Lanes

A floodway crossing should not be designed within a section of road where overtaking lanes are used. Safety
will be compromised where drivers are focusing on overtaking a vehicle rather than paying attention to the
water crossing the road. Further, when there is a platoon overtaking, the following vehicles may not expect
the front vehicle to decelerate to the floodway crossing that is overtopped.

Austroads 2023 | page 119


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Crossfall

There are several possible methods of designing the cross section of the floodway crossing:
• the normal crown section of the road
• one-way crossfall with the flow
• one-way crossfall against the flow.

Road Authorities may prefer one or other of these methods and require that method to be adopted in some
situations. However, the circumstances of a design may require consideration of the following:
• Vehicles traversing floodway crossings under flood conditions generally travel down the middle of the
road. It is easier to travel down the middle of a floodway crossing with a two-way crossfall.
• The two-way crossfall generally matches the shape of the approach road.
• A one-way crossfall induces smooth, stable flow over the floodway crossing, but may result in a hydraulic
jump forming on the road surface (for down-slope flow).
• A one-way crossfall against the flow will produce a variable depth of water across the floodway crossing,
producing added difficulty for the driver.
• A one-way crossfall with the flow will produce a similar depth of water across the floodway crossing until
the tail water rises when a variable depth will occur, producing added difficulty for the driver.

Designers should seek advice from hydraulic specialists to determine the optimum solution for the case
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

involved.

Safety Barriers

Safety Barriers and Bridge Rails reduce the efficiency of the floodway crossing in times of flood but may be
desirable for road safety at other times. The embankment height and road geometry should be designed (as
much as possible) so that safety barriers are not required. This will minimise the hazards to vehicles on the
floodway crossing, during both wet and dry conditions.

Where a safety barrier must be installed, the design should be based on the circumstances of the case and
in accordance with AGRD Part 6 and AGRD Part 6B.

Where the barriers are associated with a bridge structure:


• When the bridge is full floodway crossing width, and the main channel is shallow, consideration should
be given to omitting bridge rails and safety barrier. Road edge guideposts should be provided on the
floodway crossing to provide guidance to drivers when water covers the road (refer to Section 4.2.8).
• When the bridge is narrower than the floodway crossing, or the channel is deep, bridge rails may be
required with safety barrier protection on the approach to the bridge. The conflict in providing adequate
delineation against the obstruction any bridge rails or safety barriers provide to water flow must be
decided locally based on the specific design features and characteristics of the site, especially debris
size and load.

4.2.8 Signage

Appropriate signage is required to ensure that drivers have enough information to make a sensible decision
on whether it is safe to enter the floodway crossing or not when water is flowing across it. If possible, the sign
should indicate the different water depths and velocity for which it is safe for the types of vehicle involved to
proceed.

Austroads 2023 | page 120


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

This can also be provided in the form of flashing beacons/message boards/boom gates, but this type of
infrastructure is costly and not practicable on most low trafficked roads.

All signage at floodway crossings should conform to the requirements of AS 1742.2. It is important that the
signage is readily visible to the approaching driver and placed to enable decisions to be made in time for
appropriate action. Therefore, depth gauges are required:
• at the entry point into the floodway crossing, and must reflect the greatest depth of water on the crossing,
• at a point 25m into the floodway crossing again showing the greatest depth of water on the crossing, and
• at the start of the greatest depth of water on the floodway crossing showing the depth of water.

Road edge guideposts should be placed at 25m intervals in pairs on each side of the floodway crossing for
its full length to delineate the edge of the trafficable width. In addition, road edge guideposts should be able
to resist the pressure of debris build-up during times of inundation. Circular steel tubing has been used
successfully and where they are set into concrete batter protection, they are to be installed in circular steel
sleeves cast into the concrete batter to facilitate replacement when damaged. An example is shown in Figure
4.9.

Figure 4.9: Road edge guidepost located in concrete batter


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: TMR SD 1356.

4.2.9 Environmental Considerations

With respect to environmental considerations, floodway crossings:


• May offer environmental advantages over culverts or bridges as they will tend to spread flows more
widely. This means that the risk of scour to waterways and surrounding land is generally reduced
because flow is less concentrated.
• Should be designed so that they are not covered by water from ponding or backwater for any significant
period of time after a flood event.
• Should consider fauna movement and fish migration; however:
– If only floodplain culverts are provided (i.e. culverts located away from a watercourse channel),
designers only need to consider terrestrial movement.

Austroads 2023 | page 121


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

– Where fish migration is expected to occur across the floodplain during times of flood, a check is
required to ensure acceptable flow velocities across the floodway crossing. If fish migration is
expected to occur in times of low flow, then appropriate culverts will be required to cater for this.

4.2.10 Hydraulic Flow Considerations

A floodway crossing consists not only of the roadway embankment but also waterway openings which may
be required for one or more of the following functions:
• To reduce the afflux or rise in water height upstream due to the obstruction (embankment).
• To raise the tailwater height so that less batter protection is required on the downstream side e.g. grass
instead of concrete.
• To act as anti-ponding structures for low flow stream conditions.

Flow over roadways may be free flow or submerged flow. In the initial stages of overtopping a low tailwater
usually exists and free flow occurs. Under these circumstances flow passes through critical depth over the
road and the discharge is determined by flood heights upstream.

Free flow may be either:


• Plunging flow which flows over the shoulder and down the downstream face of the embankment. The flow
then penetrates the tailwater surface producing a submerged hydraulic jump on the downstream slope.
Velocities are likely to be high and erosive.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• Surface flow which separates from the surface of the road embankment and rides over the surface of the
tailwater. This flow will have less erosion potential downstream.

Submerged flow occurs when the discharge is controlled by the tailwater height as well as the headwater
heights. This occurs when the depth of flow over the road is everywhere greater than the critical depth.

Where a floodway crossing is constructed above ground height, it may or may not act as a control on flow,
depending upon the headwater and tailwater conditions. In the initial stages of overtopping of the road a low
tailwater condition usually exists, and a free outfall condition occurs.

Typical velocities of flow over a floodway crossing are shown in Figure 4.10. This figure illustrates the
conditions that result from rising tailwater (e.g. submerged hydraulic jump).

Austroads 2023 | page 122


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.10: Indicative velocities of flow over a typical floodway crossing


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Hydraulic Design

4.3.1 Flow Over the Road

Equation 31, the broad crested weir formula used for flow over a road, is:

𝐶𝑠 31
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑓 𝐿𝐻1.5 ( )
𝐶𝑓

where

𝑄 = Discharge over floodway (m3/s)

𝐶𝑓 = Coefficient of discharge ‘free’ flow

Austroads 2023 | page 123


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

𝐶𝑠 = Coefficient of discharge flow with submergence

𝐿 = Length of floodway (m)

𝐻 = Specific head or specific energy (m)

With reference to Figure 4.3

ℎ = Height difference between the floodway crown and the upstream water surface

𝑉 = Approach velocity of the stream

𝑙 = Top width of road formation

The flow over the floodway crossing may be calculated by means of the following design procedure:
1. Calculate the Stage-Discharge curve (height versus discharge) for the unrestricted section, from open
channel hydraulics (see Section 2).
2. Select a tailwater height and a headwater height (given h and V) from the Stage-Discharge curve.
3. Calculate H/l with Equation 32.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝐻 32
𝑙

where

𝑉2
𝐻 = ℎ+ = 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑐𝑖𝑓𝑖𝑐 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑑
2𝑔

4. From Figure 4.3


• For H/l < 0.15 use curve A to obtain value of Cf.
• For H/l > 0.15 (usual case) use curve B to obtain the free flow coefficient of discharge Cf.
• Calculate D/H x 100 and use curve C to obtain the submergence factor Cs/Cf.
• Calculate the discharge over the road using the broad crested weir formula, Equation 31.

Austroads 2023 | page 124


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.11: Discharge coefficients for flow over floodway crossings


Percentage Submergence D/H x 100

Note: Use this curve for


submergence factor D/H >
0.76

Submergence Factor Cs/Cf


3/2
Overall Q = Cf L H Cs/Cf
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Note: Use this curve for free flow


coefficients with H/l ratios < 0.15

Head on Roadway H (m)

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 125


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.3.2 Full Floodway Crossing Calculations

Floodway crossings incorporating culverts and bridges will require calculations in addition to those above.

The basic principle is that the total flow over the road and through the waterway structures equals the flow
downstream in the unrestricted channel.

Given the many combinations of headwater and tailwater possible, it is necessary to fix at least one of these
parameters for each design calculation.

With flow over the road, the issue of whether or not road batter protection is needed becomes important as
the calculations require the tailwater to be fixed when the flood is at the point of overtopping the road.

Guidelines relating to the need for protection are given in Section 4.6. The tailwater height for floodways with
other than grassed batters is usually more than 300 mm and up to 600–700 mm below the crown of the road
when the road is about to be overtopped.

Full floodway crossing design must satisfy Case A and Case B conditions.

Case A: When the flood is at the point of overtopping the road:


• The tailwater height is not below the height specified for the type of protection to be adopted.
• Velocities through the bridges and/or culverts are acceptable. (Scouring velocities may be acceptable, if
additional outlet protection or the formation of scour holes is acceptable). At the point of overtopping, the
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

velocity through the culvert or bridge will be at its maximum.

Figure 4.4 illustrates results of calculations performed using the steps below for an actual floodway crossing.

The step-by-step design procedure for this case follows:


1. Calculate the rating curve (height versus discharge) for the unrestricted channel in order to determine the
tailwater height.
2. Fix the height of the road as a first trial. The initial height of the road may be based on trafficability, e.g.
for required trafficability in an ARI 20 year flood, the initial road height may be the height of the ARI 20
year flood height in the unrestricted channel. This allows culverts to be designed for a maximum head of
300 mm with the tailwater at the crown height of the road. It will be found that a lower road height will give
less fill in the embankment, but require more culverts under the road in the ARI 20 year flood.
3. Fix the headwater height at the crown of the road (or the highest edge if superelevated).
4. Find the velocity Vx through a suitable major culvert/bridge with the headwater in (3) above and the
tailwater corresponding to the type of floodway protection to be adopted. Say this tailwater height is Htx
on Figure 4.4. Case A, corresponding to a total discharge, Qx in the unrestricted channel.
5. With this velocity Vx find the total area of waterway required from Total Area Required = Qx/Vx and select
other culverts to give this total.
6. For the fixed headwater and the tailwater height, Htx, calculate the actual flow through each culvert and
bridge and total the discharges to give Qy which may or may not be equal to Qx because of the different
sized openings.
7. Adjust the culvert and bridge areas so that with the fixed headwater and tailwater height, Htx, the total
flow equals Qx. With progressive adjustments the total discharge may be Qy or Qz and so on.

Austroads 2023 | page 126


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.12: Example floodway calculations


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Note that the initial assumption of all the waterways having the same velocity is only approximate, as
different size and shape openings have different hydraulic efficiency. This is why the same head will give
different velocities.

The structures giving Qx are to be considered minimum requirements for the floodway crossing regardless of
the requirements calculated for a peak flood above the roadway, as all overtopping floods pass through this
stage.

It should also be noted that the design velocities through culverts are normally in the range 1.8 m/s to 3.0
m/s with 2.4 m/s commonly adopted, depending on the scour resistance of the surface material downstream.
Higher and lower velocities have been adopted. Section 3 – Culverts discusses the hydraulic design of
culverts and methods for erosion control are contained in AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.6.

Case B: At the peak of the flood above the floodway:


• velocities through the waterway structures and over the floodway crossing are acceptable
• afflux caused by the floodway crossing is acceptable.

Austroads 2023 | page 127


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The step-by-step design procedure for this case follows:

At the peak of the overtopping flood, allowance for flow over the road must be made and afflux calculated for
the design flood (e.g. ARI 20 year in the example in Case A above).

The flow over the road is added to that through the culvert(s) and bridge(s) and the calculations initially
include the structures from Case A. Generally, a range of floods should be considered. With reference to
Figure 4.4 and Case A and Case B, the procedure is:
1. Find the tailwater height corresponding to the design flood discharge from the rating curve for the
unrestricted channel.
2. Select a headwater height slightly above the tailwater height in (1), say 0.1 m above, and calculate the
flow over the road and through each culvert and/or bridge with this headwater-tailwater combination. Add
these flows together to obtain a total flow.
3. Compare this flow with the design flood discharge. If this flow is smaller, a greater head/afflux is required
to ensure that the check flood is passed over the road and through the waterways.
4. Adopt a higher headwater and obtain the total flow and obtain a range of flood discharges for flow over
the road and through the waterway.
5. Plot these flows against their respective headwater heights. Join these points to make the curve shown
on Figure 4.4 Case B.
6. From the curve, find the headwater which gives the required design flood discharge.
7. If the afflux is acceptable, calculations are complete. If the afflux is too high, additional bridge or culvert
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

waterways are required. Waterways from Case A are not to be reduced.


8. Calculate the afflux for the check flood (usually of ARI 50, or ARI 100 years).

Because of flow over the road, maximum velocities are obtained from Case B. Both velocity and afflux
requirements are to be met.

Time of Submergence and Closure

4.4.1 Introduction

Flood submergence or closure of roads are important considerations in the planning, design and
management of road networks. Flooding of roads is a concern as it causes disruptions to private and
commercial transport and damage to the road infrastructure. Roadway flood immunity is typically expressed
through Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP), that is, the AEP event up to which the road is immune to
inundation.

Section 6.4 of the AGRD Part 5 provides advice on the selection of an appropriate flood immunity and
guidance of suitable flood immunity targets for various roadway classes. While this section provides valuable
guidance on the risk of flood closures, disruption to transport is often a factor of the duration of closure as
well as the annual risk.

In addition to flood immunity, assessment of the time of closure or submergence from flooding can be
beneficial and is especially important in cases where the recommended level of flood immunity may not be
achievable. Time of closure also informs the extent of disruption which aids roadway infrastructure economic
assessment and planning. Therefore, time of closure may be of higher importance than flood immunity when
attempting to minimise disruption to traffic. For example, a road with a low level of flood immunity but a short
time of closure can result in limited disruption to traffic. Consequently, the time of closure is an important
factor of road infrastructure design with select highways and roads within Australia affected by frequent flood
closures but have minimal disruption to traffic due to short times of closure.

Austroads 2023 | page 128


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Flood closure is measured by either the Time of Submergence (ToS), defined as when there is any water on
the road, or Time of Closure (ToC), when the road is closed to traffic because of flooding. The road is
defined as closed when it is not trafficable due to flood water crossing the road that is sufficiently deep and/or
fast flowing to be classified as dangerous for vehicles. Further discussion about roadway trafficability is
provided in Section 6.11 of AGRD Part 5. Time of Closure or Submergence is typically assessed for either a
major design event flood or a historical flood.

Time of Submergence or Closure is often developed to represent Average Annual Time of Closure or
Submergence (AAToC/AAToS), a statistical measure of the average number of hours a road is closed or
submerged per year. These two measures, in conjunction with the flood immunity, assist in the assessment
of roadway performance and the risk and consequences of flooding.

Some road safety organisations consider that any flow over the road means that it is not trafficable,
expressed as the slogan “if it’s flooded, forget it”. While there is a reasonable justification for assessing a
road as closed when there is any inundation, the advice adopted by Austroads is to regard a road as
trafficable when the depth-velocity factor is below the limit provided in Section 6.10. The limit for small
vehicles is when the D.V factor is less than 0.3 (with a limiting still water depth of 0.3 m and a limiting velocity
of 3 m/s at a shallow depth), so this value is adopted as the limit for trafficability on a flooded road. The D.V
factor is a design guide; it is difficult to apply when motorists are making decisions on trafficability.

The AAToC/AAToS is dependent on two factors, the flood immunity and the response time of the catchment,
which give the period of occurrence. This may result in similar AAToS/AAToC values where one crossing
has short frequent submergence and the other has infrequent but longer submergence. However, the
disruption and the impact on transport in these two cases may be quite different.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Time of Submergence or Closure can also be developed to represent Average Duration of Submergence or
Closure (ADS/ADC) which is based on the analysis of every occurrence (not an annual average). ADS is of
importance when distinguishing a high number of short periods of submergence from a smaller number of
longer periods. For two crossings with the same AATOS, high ADS values are typically indicative of roads
with a high level of flood immunity, since the road is not closed as frequently but is closed for a long period of
time when closed. ADS is generally used in the analysis of the social aspects of traffic disruption more than
the economic aspects which are better represented by the AAToS/AAToC.

Large flat catchments will respond more slowly than small steep catchments so the time of submergence for
these catchments will generally be longer for an equivalent flood immunity.

In small steep catchments, where the response time is short, the time of submergence may be low, even for
a crossing with low flood immunity. In small steep catchments, and also for urban catchments where the
response time is short, floods may occur and then recede very quickly. In this case the disruption to traffic
may be minimal. Similarly, in small catchments the period of inundation may be low even if the flood
immunity is low. In this situation, the time of submergence may be short so the cost of disruption may be very
low and the additional cost of providing for a higher level of flood immunity may not be justified.

Large flat catchments that have a long response time may inundate the road for extended periods of time. In
this case the cost of disruption may be high and a higher level of flood immunity may be justified.

Additionally, there may be situations where the road crosses a tributary close to the junction with a major
stream. If the road is inundated by both the local catchment run-off and backwater from the major stream, the
time of submergence may be quite different for the two flood mechanisms. The local catchment run-off, from
a small catchment, may have a short time of submergence, while the larger catchment may inundate the
road for longer periods of time. Local residents can often identify these two sources of closure and they may
be quite distinct. This issue has been discussed in a paper by McGrath et al (2008). When calculating the
time of submergence or closure in these situations, the calculation must consider both sources of inundation.
The risk of the mechanisms occurring independently must also be considered which would require the total
ToS to be the summation of both independent mechanisms.

Austroads 2023 | page 129


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

While most road closures due to flooding occur during flood events, where the roadway flood immunity is
very low, the time of closure may not be reflected accurately by the flood event hydrographs. These
situations can occur where the road is inundated for months at a time during the wet season or inundated by
tides.

4.4.2 Calculating of Time of Submergence and Closure

There are three aspects of the calculation of flood submergence or closure times, as follows.
1. Time of Submergence or Closure for a specified historical or design flood (ToS/ToC). This aspect is used
directly to provide an understanding of flood performance and is especially useful for consultation as it
allows a description of actual floods that are easier to understand during consultation programmes. This
step is also needed as an input to the next two aspects.
2. Average Annual Times of Submergence or Closure (AAToS/AAToC). The AAToS/AAToC is the statistical
measure of the average number of hours a road is submerged or closed per year. This parameter is
especially valuable for assessing the cost of traffic disruption since it can be used in conjunction with the
traffic volumes.
3. Average Duration of Submergence or Closure (ADS/ADC). The ADS/ADC is based on the analysis of
every occurrence and is not an annual average. ADS/ADC aids in identifying frequent short periods of
submergence or closure from less frequent longer periods of submergence or closure.

Time of Closure calculations must account for roadway trafficability where closure is dependent on flood
water crossing the road that is sufficiently deep and/or fast flowing to be classified as dangerous for vehicles.
As there are several factors which affect the trafficability of a roadway, for simplicity, the following sections
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

will focus on submergence. Calculation of Time of Closure is undertaken in a similar manner as


submergence but should account for trafficability.

Time of Submergence and Closure

Time of Submergence or Closure (ToS/ToC) is defined as the period where water is on the road or the road
is closed due to flooding. This can be calculated through the analysis of either hydrograph or level vs time
data. ToS/ToC can be calculated for either:
• Historical flood event
• Design flood event

Hydrograph or level data at the location of interest is required to calculate the ToS/ToC for either an historical
or design flood event. Additionally, minimum roadway level or the minimum flow rate at which inundation or
closure occurs is also required. If the appropriate data is available, calculating the ToS/ToC is undertaken by
directly assessing the period where either the minimum road level or minimum inundation flow rate is
exceeded during the event of interest. Figure 4.13 illustrates the time of submergence based on flood
hydrograph data.

Austroads 2023 | page 130


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.13: Time of submergence using flood hydrograph


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

ToS/ToC evaluation for historical floods can be undertaken using recorded data from a stream gauge located
sufficiently close to the roadway or bridge being assessed. This does not commonly occur due to the limited
number of gauges but is the most accurate approach. Furthermore, if there is no stream gauge located close
to the roadway, it is possible to calculate a continuous record of discharge from a continuous hydrology
model and use this sequence of flows in the calculation of times of submergence in exactly the same way as
a streamflow record would be used.

Modelled data for both historical and design flood events can be used in lieu of recorded data when
appropriate recorded data is not available. If a modelled historic flood event approach is being adopted, care
should be taken to ensure the model is sufficiently calibrated for the location of interest.

The ToS/ToC assessment will vary depending on the purpose of the investigation, but roadway design
projects typically require the assessment be undertaken for a range of flood probabilities. For the
assessment of design flood events, ARR2019 recommends applying an ensemble of typical temporal
patterns rather than a single design temporal pattern. Testing has demonstrated that on most catchments the
majority of events in the ensemble patterns are clustered around the mean and median. Following these
recommendations, the assessment of design flood ToS/ToC should also incorporate the application of
ensemble temporal patterns. An example of an ensemble ToS assessment for a selected storm probability
(e.g. 20% AEP) is presented in Figure 4.14. The presented data indicates that a mean ToS of approximately
56 hours (based the 72-hour storm event) for the ensemble assessment.

Austroads 2023 | page 131


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.14: Time of submergence design storm temporal pattern ensemble


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Average Annual Time of Submergence or Closure (AAToS/AAToC)

Stream gauge analysis

If there is a stream gauge located on the stream at or very near the bridge, this gauge can be used to
analyse the ToS/ToC and the AAToS/AAToC. The procedure for applying the stream gauge records is as
follows:
1. Calculate the flow level that will just inundate the road (for time of submergence) or close the road (for
time of closure).
2. Calculate the total period of time where the road is submerged (or closed) from the complete record of the
stream gauge.
3. Calculate the average duration per year that the road is submerged (or closed). This is the
AAToS/AAToC.

An example stream gauge data is presented in Figure 4.15 with ToS and AAToS (using stream gauge data)
presented in Table 4.2. Please note this procedure does not provide the duration of submergence (or
closure) for a particular design flood event.

Austroads 2023 | page 132


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.15: Time of submergence – stream gauge data versus bridge level
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Table 4.2 Annual Time of Submergence – stream gauge analysis

Level at which Average Annual Time


Years of gauge Time of Submergence
Submergence Description of Submergence
data (years) (hours)
occurs (m AHD) (hours)

Existing Closure
4.7 22 748 34
Level

As with all hydrology analysis, it is important that the streamflow record is sufficiently long to provide a
representative sample of flow or level. If the period of record is too short, or the period of record is not
representative, the result from the calculation may not be reliable.

It is hard to define the period of record that would be adequate for this analysis since it depends on the
variability at the site and the flood immunity considered as well as other conditions. However, it is likely that if
there is less than 20 years of record at the site the results may not be reliable.

The analysis of stream gauge data for assessing AAToS/AAToC can be used for roads with any level of
flood immunity but is best suited to those where the flood immunity is low. Where the flood immunity is
moderately high (e.g. higher than a 10% AEP level), the gauged record may not have recorded sufficient
large floods to be reliable.

Flood hydrograph analysis

Determining AAToS/AAToC where stream gauge analysis is not possible can be undertaken using modelled
design flood event hydrograph or flood level outputs. Design flood event modelling AAToS/AAToC
assessments are required to be undertaken for a range of flood probabilities from the flood that just
submerges the road to the PMF event. Additionally, the assessment must be assessed for an ensemble of
typical temporal patterns. It should also be noted that this method is best suited for roadways where the flood
immunity is moderately high (approximately >10% AEP) as roadways with low immunity may be inundated
more than once a year and falls outside the limits of the statistical analysis.

Austroads 2023 | page 133


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The ToS/ToC calculation used in determining the AAToS/AAToC should be undertaken based on the
following modelling approaches:
• Hydraulic modelling approach.
– Run all appropriate AEP events and durations for all ensemble temporal patterns to determine
ToS/ToC within an appropriate hydraulic model.
• Hydrologic modelling approach - this approach should only be adopted if the hydraulic modelling
approach is not practicable.
– Run all appropriate AEP events and durations for all ensemble temporal patterns within an appropriate
hydrologic model.
– Use a rating curve (or stage discharge curve for a hydraulic structure) to determine ToS/ToC.
• Simplified approach - this approach should only be adopted if both the hydraulic and hydrologic modelling
approaches are not practicable or the AAToS/AAToC is not essential to the project.
– Model only critical flow duration for all temporal patterns and adopt mean ToS/ToC This can be
undertaken using either a hydraulic model or a hydrologic model and rating curve. Alternately, model
only one temporal pattern per AEP (e.g. temporal pattern that generates mean critical flow) to
determine ToS/ToS.

The procedure for calculating the Average Annual Time of Submergence or Closure (AAToS/AAToC) is
outlined in the steps below.

Step 1
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Determine the AEP of the flood for which the stream crossing is immune (or trafficable if calculating AAToC).

Step 2

Determine the ToS/ToC ty for a series of floods greater than the submergence (or trafficable) capacity flood,
noting the AEPs of each of these floods. This step should incorporate the assessment of ensemble temporal
patterns with the recommendation that the mean time of inundation for each AEP flood be adopted.

Estimate the tmax by extrapolating a graph of time of submergence (or closure) versus AEP or by estimating
the probable maximum flood for the catchment. It should be noted that the probable maximum time of
submergence (or closure) cannot be disregarded in the calculation of the AAToS/AAToC).

Step 3

Calculate the probability FT(t) of the road being submerged (or closed) for each AEP flood:

FT(t) = 1 − 𝑃
33

Where

P = Probability of Exceedance

Step 4

Using the ToS/ToC, ty and the probability, FT(t) of the road being closed for each AEP flood, draw the
cumulative probability distribution.

This distribution gives the probability of the road being closed in any year for less than t hours.

Austroads 2023 | page 134


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 5

Determine the probability density function:

∆𝐹𝑇 (𝑡)
𝑓𝑇 (𝑡) = 34
∆𝑡

This is the slope of the line connecting each point on the cumulative probability distribution.

Step 6

Determine AAToS/AAToC as:

AAToS = ∑ ∆𝑝 × 𝑡̅
35

where

∆𝑝 = area of each rectangle in the probability density function

centroid distance of each rectangle from the 𝑓𝑇 (𝑡) axis of the probability density
𝑡̅ =
function. The area of each rectangle in the probability density function.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Average Duration of Submergence or Closure

Average Duration of Submergence or Closure (ADS/ADC) requires an estimate of roadway immunity and the
number of occurrences of closure, which is most critical for crossings with a low flood immunity. The only
feasible means of estimating the ADS/C is from a continuous record of streamflow data. The continuous
record is analysed to identify the period of time for each exceedance as well as the number of exceedances,
and the average is calculated from this data.

In the case of no continuous record, the estimate should be made from approximating the design flood
hydrographs as well as an approximation of the number of occurrences each year. This is recognised as an
uncertain estimate.

Austroads 2023 | page 135


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Breakout 1: Average Annual Time of Closure

This example covers the use of each method, hydraulic, hydrologic and simplified, to calculate AAToS/AAToC. The
examples are based on the same project. However, it should be noted that although the provided examples show a
reasonable correlation in AAToS values, this may differ on other projects with the simplified method tending to
underpredict AAToS/AAToC values as it only assesses the critical storm burst duration for peak flow (or height) but
not duration of closure.

Hydraulic modelling approach

Run all appropriate AEP events and durations for all ensemble temporal patterns to determine ToS/ToC within an
appropriate hydraulic model. An example of model outputs is presented in Figure 4.16 to Figure 4.18.

Figure 4.16: Time of submergence for 20% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 136


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.17: Time of submergence for 5% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Figure 4.18: Time of submergence for 1% AEP design storm temporal pattern ensemble

Using the ToS/ToC data generated from the hydraulic modelling assessment, undertake Steps 2 to 6 to
determine the AAToS/AAToC as shown in Error! Reference source not found.Table 4.3: AAToS
hydraulic modelling approach example

AEP Probability of ToS AAToS


FT(t) 𝒕̅ fT(t) Δp Δp * 𝒕̅
(%) Exceedance (%) (hours) (hours)
63.21 0.63 0.00 0.37 25.08

Austroads 2023 | page 137


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Breakout 1: Average Annual Time of Closure


20 0.20 56.21 0.80 28.11 0.01 0.43 12.14
5 0.05 66.91 0.95 61.56 0.01 0.15 9.23
1 0.01 76.41 0.99 71.66 0.00 0.04 2.87
PMF 0.00 90.00 1.00 83.21 0.00 0.01 0.83

Hydrologic modelling approach

This approach should only be adopted if the hydraulic modelling approach is not practicable. Like the hydraulic
modelling approach, model all appropriate AEP events and durations for all ensemble temporal patterns within an
appropriate hydrologic model. Use a rating curve (or stage discharge curve for a hydraulic structure) to determine
ToS/ToC. This data should present similar to that presented in Figure 4.16 to Figure 4.18.

Using the ToS/ToC data generated from the hydrologic modelling and rating curve assessment, undertake Steps 2 to
6 to determine the AAToS/AAToC as shown in Table 4.4.

Table 4.4: AAToS hydrologic modelling approach example

AEP Probability of ToS FT(t) 𝒕̅ fT(t) Δp Δp * 𝒕̅ AAToS


(%) Exceedance (%) (hours) (hours)
63.21 0.63 0.00 0.37
20 0.20 59.10 0.80 29.55 0.01 0.43 12.77
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

5 0.05 73.20 0.95 66.15 0.01 0.15 9.92 26.53


1 0.01 76.80 0.99 75.00 0.01 0.04 3.00
PMF 0.00 90.00 1.00 83.40 0.00 0.01 0.83

Simplified approach

This approach should only be adopted if both the hydraulic and hydrologic modelling approaches are not practicable
or the AAToS/AAToC is not essential to the project. Model only critical flow duration for all temporal patterns and
adopt mean ToS/ToC.

Using the ToS/ToC data generated from the simplified approach, undertake Steps 2 to 6 to determine the
AAToS/AAToC as shown in Table 4.5.

Table 4.5: AAToS basic approach example

AEP Probability of ToS FT(t) 𝒕̅ fT(t) Δp Δp * 𝒕̅ AAToS


(%) Exceedance (%) (hours) (hours)
63.21 0.63 0.00 0.37
20 0.20 53.08 0.80 26.54 0.01 0.43 11.47
5 0.05 67.30 0.95 60.19 0.01 0.15 9.03 24.21
1 0.01 76.68 0.99 71.99 0.00 0.04 2.88
PMF 0.00 90.00 1.00 83.34 0.00 0.01 0.83

Austroads 2023 | page 138


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.4.3 Time Required to Reopen the Road after Flood Closures

The analysis of times of submergence and closure presented above relate purely to the period of time that
the road is directly affected by flooding.

In addition to this period, the road may be actually closed for longer. When a road has been closed, it must be
inspected and repairs carried out, if necessary, before it can be opened again. In addition, the road may remain
closed for a longer period if the road pavement and subgrade has been saturated and some delay is considered
necessary to allow the road to dry before traffic, especially heavy traffic, is allowed back on the road.

An inspection is needed after a road has been inundated, with this requirement especially important for
bridges. The time required for this inspection depends on the location, which affects the time required for
mobilisation and travel, and the availability of appropriate inspection staff. The inspection may be simple and
not require much time, or there may be more difficult decisions needed. This time can be quite variable, but
each individual location and situation needs evaluation. However, the time required for inspection is likely to
be 6-12 hours or more for each flood event.

The time for repairs can vary significantly. If the inspection finds that there has been minimal damage, this
time may be zero. However, more extensive damage may require a longer time of closure.

The time to allow for drying of the road will depend on the agency policy. This may be accepted as zero if
traffic is allowed back on the road without delay or it could be a longer time depending on the assessed risk.
This delay can vary depending on the vehicle type, perhaps delaying the return of heavy vehicles more than
light.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

In each project case an assessment of the additional time above the actual inundation time must be
assessed and this time must be added to each closure event. In some cases, this additional time may be
greater than the actual time of flooding.

4.4.4 Costs of Flood Closures

An important application of the times of closure assessment is to work out the cost of the disruption to
transport caused by the flood closures.

The cost of delay for traffic caused by roads closed by flooding is provided in the Cost-benefit Analysis
Manual (TMR, 2011) and the Austroads Guide to Project Evaluation (Austroads 2012).

The TMR cost-benefit analysis manual shows the formula which depends on the AAToC and ADC as
Equation 36. This formula is then used with the number of each category of vehicles to calculate the total
cost of delay.

In addition to waiting for the flood closure to end, vehicles could also divert to an alternative route or
abandon the trip completely. These options are not described further here, since it is most likely that vehicles
will wait for flooding to end.

The criteria for cost of delay are listed in Table 4.6


1 𝐴𝐴𝑇𝑂𝐶 𝐴𝐷𝐶
Waiting Time = 2 (𝐴𝐴𝑇𝑂𝐶 − 𝐴𝐷𝐶
× (𝑇𝑟𝑢𝑛𝑐 ( 24
) × 12)) 36

where

Trunc = Truncates a number to an integer by removing the fractional part of the number

AATOC = Average Annual Time of Closure

ADC = Average Duration of Closure

Austroads 2023 | page 139


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 4.6: Estimated values of travel time – occupant and freight payload values

Non-urban Urban Freight travel time

Occupancy Value per Non-urban Urban


Vehicle type Occupancy Value per
rate occupant
rate occupant
(persons/veh) ($/person- Dollar values per
(persons/veh) ($/person-hour)
hour) vehicle-hour

Cars
Private 1.70 13.17 1.60 13.17
Business 1.30 42.15 1.40 42.15
Rigid trucks
Light commercial
1.30 23.32 1.30 23.32 0.69 1.35
(2 axle, 4 tyre)
Medium (2 axle, 6
1.20 23.62 1.30 23.62 1.86 3.68
tyre)
Heavy (3 axle) 1.00 24.07 1.00 24.07 6.39 12.58
Combination vehicles
Rigid (3 axle) plus
1.00 24.67 1.00 24.67 27.04 n.a.
dog trailer (5 axle)
B-double 1.00 24.67 1.00 25.79 27.38 53.93
Twin steer (4 axle)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

plus dog trailer (4 1.00 24.67 1.00 25.79 26.13 n.a.


axle)
Twin steer (4 axle)
plus dog trailer (5 1.00 25.05 1.00 26.24 27.86 n.a.
axle)
Double road train 1.00 25.79 1.00 26.90 36.59 n.a.
B-triple
1.00 25.05 1.00 26.24 37.35 n.a.
combination
A B combination 1.00 25.05 1.00 26.24 44.98 n.a.
Double B-double
1.00 25.05 1.00 26.24 54.55 n.a.
combination
Triple road train 1.00 25.05 1.00 26.24 53.93 n.a.
Large bus (coach)
Bus driver 1.00 24.67 1.00 24.67 0.00 n.a.
Bus (coach)
20.00 13.17 20.00 13.17 0.00 n.a.
passenger

Note: Values based on June 2010 - consideration should be given to increasing these values due to inflation. n.a.
indicates data is not available

Flood Damage

4.5.1 Flood Damage Examples

Designers must be aware of the potential types of failures that can result from floods and adopt the most
appropriate protection for the situation under consideration (refer to Section 4.7). These examples of extreme
flood damage show that failures can be caused by either or both upstream and downstream protection
failures (See Figure 4.19).

Austroads 2023 | page 140


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.19: Flood damage examples

The floodway crossing apron on the downstream side of the floodway crossing sends supercritical flows
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

away from the structure into the downstream channel where a hydraulic jump develops as the flows return to
a sub-critical condition. The turbulence in the hydraulic jump will scour the natural bed and develop a scour
hole (See Figure 4.20).

Figure 4.20: Scour beyond downstream apron

Austroads 2023 | page 141


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

To counter the actions of scouring under the apron, the Type 1 – Floodway Crossing Protection (refer to
Section Type 1 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin, Batter and Apron) is designed with a vertical
shear key wall (upstand or cut-off wall) of at least 0.5m. The length of the apron should be sufficient to avoid
this type of scouring.

Type 2 protection (refer to Section Type 2 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin and Batter with No
Apron) relies on riprap to counter the erosion and this must be sufficiently long to avoid the effects of this
scouring. The purpose of the riprap is to move the scour hole location away from the floodway crossing
structure and prevent undermining over time. The rock riprap requirements for the culvert outlet aprons
include 6.0m of riprap in the downstream direction. A scour hole that develops beyond 6.0m from the
concrete apron appears to be acceptable. Riprap can be thickened at the end to reduce the chance of rock
movement, but over a long time and following large events some rock will require “topping up” with more
similar rock. This is likely at the edges of the rock mass.

Floodway Crossing Profiles

4.6.1 Introduction

Selection of the type of floodway crossing and associated protection treatment against scour is governed by:
• whether flow across the crossing is free or submerged, and
• under free flow conditions, whether plunging or surface flow occurs downstream from the crossing.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The tailwater height when the flood is at the point of overtopping the road usually controls the degree of
protection required for a floodway crossing. Therefore, the cost of providing adequate bridge and/or culvert
waterways to raise the tailwater high enough to require minimum protection becomes a prime consideration
as well as the cost of the protection itself.

Overtopping flows of long duration and at frequent intervals may cause pavement failures and softening of
the embankment, thus aggravating any tendency to scour. Even with a high tailwater when the flood is at the
point of overtopping the road, the Times of Submergence may indicate more elaborate protection than
natural grass.

The density of the natural vegetation, fertility of the soils and climatic variation are also important
considerations on the ability of vegetation to effectively protect the floodway crossing embankment when
determining protection requirements. The stability of the stream bed must also be considered, with some
sites requiring deep cut off walls to minimise the effect of scoring on even a well-designed crossing. Mobile
stream beds complicate floodway crossing design sometimes requiring a low- height bridge rather than
culverts to maintain trafficability as the stream bed rises and falls depending on the flows in the stream.

For low standard floodway crossings in flat country, the bed heights surveyed downstream should extend
sufficiently to allow design checks to be made regarding the possibility of ponding at the site due to
unforeseen natural deposits, farm dams and access roads downstream.

4.6.2 Types of Profiles

Overview

There are essentially five types of floodway crossing that cater for a range of calculated volume and velocity
situations:
• Profile 1 – Full protection.
• Profile 2 – Significant protection.
• Profile 3 – Downstream protection only.

Austroads 2023 | page 142


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

• Profile 4 – Minimal protection.


• Profile 5 – Bed level floodway crossing – no culverts.

These floodway crossing types have performed satisfactorily with their associated limitations noted. The
crossing type to be adopted will be determined after the assessment of the following site characteristics:
• hydrology and hydraulic requirements,
• geotechnical considerations,
• environmental considerations, and
• site characteristics.

Experience has shown that most failures of floodway crossings with downstream batter protection
commences by scouring at the downstream aprons and/or the downstream edge of the road formation, and
therefore a reduction in standard in these areas should not be considered in order to reduce costs.

All floodway crossings design should consider the following:


• Although not clearly defined, it appears that protection of the upstream batters may only be required in
floodway crossings of low flood immunity in major streams. As a precaution where only downstream
protection is adopted, protection for a distance of about 6.0 m on each side of major culverts on the
upstream side may be placed to offset possible scour due to turbulence from the mixing of longitudinal
and direct flows at the culvert inlets.
• Provision of culverts to ensure the tailwater is usually not more than 600 mm below the downstream edge
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

of the road formation when overtopping first occurs (actual range 300–700 mm). It is important to note
that a high afflux may not be acceptable in some areas and a high afflux may require non-standard
additional outlet protection at culverts to control erosion. This does not apply in the case of Profile 5 – Bed
level floodway crossings.
• Full protection of the top surface of the road formation, as for floodway crossings with grassed batters.
• Protection of at least the downstream batter.
• Provision of adequate downstream aprons. For height of road embankment (H) equal to or more than 2.0
m, the downstream apron should extend at least 1.5H metres away from the toe of the embankment. For
H less than 2.0 m, the downstream apron should extend at least H away from the toe of the embankment
unless otherwise specified.
• Hydrostatic pressure on any downstream protection using a concrete slab (refer to Section Introduction)

A brief description of successful types of floodway crossing protection follows, and sectional details of these
types are shown in Sections Types of Profiles. These types are not in any order of preference and
operational and cost comparisons should be made where more than one suitable protection solution exists.
However, the availably of local materials and the stability of the stream bed and site will have a large bearing
on the type of protection selected.

Floodway Crossing protection types are addressed separately in Section Floodway Crossing Protection
Examples.

Profile 1 – Floodway crossing (full protection, both upstream and downstream)

This type of floodway crossing requires full protection on both upstream and downstream batters where the
calculated volume and velocity are extremely high having the potential to cause profoundly serious damage
to the floodway crossing structure should the protection underperform. Up and downstream protection is
essential in this scenario.

Austroads 2023 | page 143


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.21: Full protection, both upstream and downstream

Profile 2 – Floodway crossing (significant protection, upstream shoulder and full downstream)

This type of floodway crossing has full downstream protection and only shoulder protection on the upstream
side. This type has been extensively used and performed satisfactorily in remote areas where the natural
ground has a high resistance to erosion and the tail water is quite high. If the natural surface does not have a
high resistance to erosion, an appropriate apron will be required. This type of floodway crossing should not
be used in lieu of Type 1 Floodway Crossing because of cost constraints.

Figure 4.22: Significant protection, upstream shoulder and full downstream


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Profile 3 – Floodway crossing (downstream protection)

This type of floodway crossing has full downstream protection with no upstream protection. It has been
successfully used in situations where the floodwaters are of a lower volume and low velocity. If the natural
surface does not have a high resistance to erosion, an appropriate apron will be required.

Figure 4.23: Downstream protection

Austroads 2023 | page 144


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Profile 4 – Floodway crossing (minimal protection)

This is not a typical type of floodway crossing but is useful when the water flowing towards the roads is of a
sheet flow nature with little defined water channels. The low-profile design of the floodway crossing allows
the overland water to flow over the road. Erosion of the downstream shoulder will generally occur unless
treated to counter the erosion forces. Anti-ponding culverts should be placed at regular intervals along the
road (these will require small levees to divert water to the culverts) thus reducing ponding on the upstream
side of the formation.

Figure 4.24: Minimal protection

Profile 5 – Bed level floodway crossings

Bed level floodway crossings are typically used in situations where flow is intermittent and usually for short
periods. If using such a crossing results in excessive times of closure, this solution would not be acceptable.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

A 1% one-way crossfall in the direction of flow is used to ensure that the crossing is free draining thus
preventing ponding of water on the upstream side, which may result in the saturation of pavements and
subgrade. The 1% crossfall is only applied when the floodway crossing is not on a curve (the preferred
situation). If a crossing on a curve cannot be avoided, the curve superelevation (typically 3%), regardless of
the flow direction, is retained. These floodway crossings should have concrete margins on the upstream and
downstream ends to allow a chip seal to encapsulate and protect the pavement.

Figure 4.25: Bed level crossing

Austroads 2023 | page 145


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Floodway Crossing Protection Examples

4.7.1 Introduction

It is important to identify the types of potential damage that the floodway crossing under consideration is
likely to sustain before deciding on the required protection details (refer to Section 4.5). This includes a
complete assessment of the characteristics of the materials being used for the embankment and what
protection they may need to remain stable and competent. For example, dispersive clays and silts should be
avoided if possible, and if they must be used, then adequate protection will be essential.

The type of protection adopted can be reinforced concrete, gabions, dumped riprap, stone pitching, cement
stabilised material, bituminous seal (refer diagrams shown for other types) or grass. The type of protection to
be adopted will be based on the design requirements and the availability of materials. In some remote areas
the availability of materials can be extremely limited, and cost will be an important factor in this assessment.

The structural design of floodway crossing protection must be undertaken for each situation. The concrete
slab should be provided with sufficient drainage under the slab to prevent uplift forces damaging it. This may
require weep holes to be provided in conjunction with an appropriate drainage layer under the slab, the
details depending on the permeability of the underlying material and the drainage paths available from it.
Where weepholes are required, they would normally be about 90 mm diameter at 1.8 m (maximum) centres
with 300 x 300 x 150mm no-fines concrete blocks behind the weepholes. The weepholes should be placed
about 300 mm above the apron height or just above long-standing water height if higher. The more porous
types of protection such as rock on filter cloths or layers and some cement stabilised gravels, depending on
the grading, do not require weepholes.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

4.7.2 Type 1 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin, Batter and Apron

This type of reinforced concrete floodway crossing protection has been constructed in many areas of
Australia. The reinforcement selected should not only satisfy strength requirements, but also prevent
temperature and shrinkage cracks. Upstream and downstream protection are necessary for Type 1
Floodway Crossings.

With a suitable width of downstream apron and weepholes, the Type 1 floodway crossing protection is
recommended as suitable for all crossings where other than grass protection is required, cost permitting.

In addition, the Type 2 floodway crossing protection is suitable for upstream protection in Profile 1 Floodway
Crossings.

Figure 4.26: Type 1 floodway crossing protection – RC margin, batter and apron

Austroads 2023 | page 146


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The slope (V on H) adopted should be assessed as a roadside hazard and treated accordingly. Depending
on the outcome of that analysis, the use of flatter batters may be acceptable, or safety barriers may be
required.

4.7.3 Type 2 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin and Batter with No Apron

This type of protection is like Type 1 without the downstream apron. It has been used successfully where the
natural ground is not prone to scouring. In some situations, gabions have been added at the toe of the batter
where scouring could be an issue due to local situations.

Figure 4.27: Type 2 floodway crossing protection – RC margin and batter with no apron
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

This type of protection is also appropriate for upstream protection for Profile 1 Floodway Crossings. See
Figure 4.29 damage starting from the upstream side of the floodway crossing approach embankment. The
effect of the safety barrier may be a least partially responsible for losing the seal/pavement on what
otherwise may have been a reasonable design.

Figure 4.28: Example of guard rail installation on floodway

Austroads 2023 | page 147


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.29: Examples of floodway crossing damage starting from the upstream side of the floodway crossing

4.7.4 Type 3 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin and Batter with Dished Apron

This is an example of a reinforced concrete floodway crossing where the tailwater depth is uncertain but
probably quite low (perhaps 700 mm or more below the downstream edge of the formation when the flood
begins to overtop the road). This type performs well but the additional cost (as compared to Type 1) must be
justified. Requires specialist design.

Commentary as for Section Type 1 Floodway Crossing Protection – RC Margin, Batter and Apron.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The slope (V on H) adopted should be assessed as a roadside hazard and treated accordingly. Depending
on the outcome of that analysis, the use of flatter batters may be acceptable, or safety barriers may be
required.

Figure 4.30: Type 3 floodway crossing protection – RC margin and batter with dished apron

4.7.5 Type 4 Floodway Crossing Protection – Stone Mattresses and Gabions

The increased use of stone mattresses and gabions has given confidence in this type of construction. Rock
fill with size 70–100 mm and median diameter of 85 mm is considered adequate for most uses.

One of the important features of this type of treatment is that localised forces can be generated at the sharp
change in slope between the road pavement and batter. A rounded shoulder (1.5 m radius) with a 1:3 slope
should be adopted. Significant forces can act on upstands near the shoulder; therefore, any mattress or
dumped riprap protection should not be allowed to project above the margin slab. Also applies to Type 6.

Mattresses must be pinned/anchored. Consider a cut off wall.

Austroads 2023 | page 148


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Cut off walls may not be necessary as mattresses usually achieve their optimum position with a little scour by
dropping into a scour proof position.

The slope (V on H) adopted should be assessed as a roadside hazard and treated accordingly. Depending
on the outcome of that analysis, the use of flatter batters may be acceptable, or safety barriers may be
required.

Figure 4.31: Type 4 floodway crossing protection – stone mattresses and gabions

4.7.6 Type 5 Floodway Crossing Protection – Bituminous Seal

This type of protection incorporating a bituminous seal is probably the lowest cost of the types shown, but its
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

use is limited.

It should only be used where:


• fill height is not higher than 900 mm,
• tailwater at overtopping is not more than 300 mm below the crown of the road, and
• time of submergence is small (hours).

Figure 4.32: Type 5 floodway crossing protection – bituminous seal

Austroads 2023 | page 149


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.7.7 Type 6 Floodway Crossing Protection – Dumped Riprap

Dumped riprap protection detail, See Figure 4.33, was developed following a floodway crossing failure and
subsequent research carried out by the Centre for Water Research (Patterson & Abercromby 1986). The
important features that should be considered in the design of this type of protection are:
• Localised uplift forces can be generated at the sharp change in slope between the road pavement and
batter. A rounded shoulder (1.5 m radius) with a 1:3 slope should be adopted, as this configuration does
not display negative pressures and the net force on the bed is always downwards.
• Significant forces can act on upstands near the shoulder. Therefore, dumped riprap protection should not
be allowed to project above the concrete slab or wall.
• Ingress of water at the upstream edge of the concrete wall may result in significant forces acting on the
wall and material downstream of the wall. Leakage at the edge should be prevented and adhesion
between the concrete and stabilised base course maximised.
• As the riprap consists of rock with grading requirements, it may have limited application in some
jurisdictions where supplies of such rock are scarce in areas where floodway crossings are constructed.

Dumped riprap is also used for protection of open channels (refer to Section 2.9.2) and for culvert outlet
protection (refer to Section 3.13). The details shown in this section have been developed specifically for
floodway crossings.

The slope (V on H) adopted should be assessed as a roadside hazard and treated accordingly. Depending
on the outcome of that analysis, the use of flatter batters may be acceptable, or safety barriers may be
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

required.

Figure 4.33 Type 6 floodway crossing protection – dumped riprap rock protection

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 150


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table 4.7: Rock protection section thickness

Velocity (m/s) Class of rock protection (tonne) Section thickness (m)


<2 None –
2.0–2.6 Facing 0.5
2.6–2.9 Light 0.75
2.9–3.9 ¼ 1.00
3.9–4.5 ½ 1.25
4.5–5.1 1.0 1.60
5.1–5.7 2.0 2.00
5.7–6.4 4.0 2.50
> 6.4 Special –

Source: MRWA (2006).

Table 4.8: Rock Sizes

Minimum percentage of rock


Approximate Rock
Rock class Rock size (m)* Mass (kg)
larger than Rock Size in Second
Column
0.4 100 0
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Facing 0.3 35 50
0.15 2.5 90
0.55 250 0
Light 0.40 100 50
0.20 10 90
0.75 500 0
¼ tonne 0.55 250 50
0.30 35 90
0.90 1000 0
½ tonne 0.70 450 50
0.40 100 90
1.15 2000 0
1 tonne 0.90 1000 50
0.55 500 90
1.45 4000 0
2 tonne 1.15 2000 50
0.75 500 90
150 Rock Pitching 0.15 x 0.15 x 0.15 100
400 Rock Pitching 0.40 x 0.40 x 0.20 60

*Assuming a specific gravity of 2.65 and spherical shape for Facing, Light, Quarter Tonne, Half Tonne, One Tonne and
Two Tonne.

Source: MRWA (2006).

Austroads 2023 | page 151


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

4.7.8 Grass Batters

Grass protection on floodway crossing batters is defined as turf or seeded grass and is used in all profile
types except where full protection applies. This is further discussed in the AGRD Part 5 – Section 3.6.2.
Grass protection of floodway crossing batters should not be considered in areas with low rainfall and subject
to drought conditions.

There are some ‘engineered or selectively bred’ grasses that have very tight root systems which can resist
erosion much better that most native and agricultural grasses. They are climate and soil type specific and are
more effective at resisting erosion than most grasses.

Because the physical properties of grass such as species, stiffness, cover density and rooting pattern vary
with soil type and climate, only general guidelines based on constructed floodway crossings are possible.

Floodway crossings with grassed batters should have the following features:
• Bitumen seal or asphalt pavements with concrete or other rigid margins/shoulders (stone pitching, cement
stabilised gravel, etc.) containing the bitumen in place.
• Alternatively, concrete blocks/nib walls along the top edges of the formation with a bitumen seal or
asphalt pavement between them may be constructed. These containing blocks may be as simple as 10%
by volume cement stabilised gravel strips 600 mm wide at the top by 180 mm deep. Concrete pavements
instead of bituminous types will, of course, cover the full width of the formation.
• Culverts under the floodway crossing section to raise the tailwater to not more than 300 mm below the
downstream edge of the road formation when overtopping first occurs.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• Overtopping occurs for a period of less than 12 hours in a 2% AEP flood. However, the type of material in
the embankment and its saturated strength may require reduction of this allowable time of submergence.
Conversely there are some low floodway crossings which withstand submergence for much longer.

For this type of protection, it is desirable to have good grass cover when the overtopping flood occurs. This in
turn requires an ability to maintain grass cover during the dry season and drought.

Worked Examples

4.8.1 Example 1: Floodway Crossing Design

The task for this example is to design a floodway crossing with 20 year ARI trafficability over a natural open
channel approximately trapezoidal in shape. The floodway crossing would be approximately 90 to 100 m
long and for cost reasons road batters will be grass covered only for protection against scour.

Preliminary considerations:
• Because the batters will be protected by grass only, culverts will be required to build up the tailwater to
not more than 300 mm below the edge of the downstream shoulder when overtopping of the road first
occurs. Allowing for crossfall, there will be a head of 450 mm and a velocity of about 2.30 to 2.45 m/s
through the culverts if this minimum tailwater is adopted. Is this acceptable on this job? (This will be
answered in the example). There is a need to confirm total head over the road is less than 300 mm for an
ARI 20 year flood.
• For 20 year ARI trafficability, the floodway crossing height should be at the 20 year unrestricted flood
height to allow the maximum amount of water over the road and save on culvert and overall costs.

In general, it is only in very long floodway crossings with very little velocity in the open channel and/or where
costly protection is unavoidable, that increasing culvert requirements by raising the road, thus decreasing the
flow over the road (to the extreme of a flood free road) may reduce the overall cost of the job.

Austroads 2023 | page 152


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 1

List all relevant criteria:


• required standard: trafficable in a 20 year ARI flood
• time of closure: maximum of one day in a 50 year ARI flood. (Calculated hydrograph shows this maximum
only a matter of hours – not included here)
• batter protection: grass
• width of floodway crossing: 10 m
• road crossfall: 3%.

Step 2

Calculate the rating curve for the unrestricted channel.

Using open channel hydraulic calculations (as discussed in Section 2 – Open Drains and Channels):
• Q50 = 162 m³/s @ Height 322.76 m
• Q20 = 130.4 m³/s @ Height 322.58 m (V = 0.68 m/s)
• Q10 = 108.1 m³/s @ Height 322.44 m
• Q5 = 70 m³/s @ Height 322.13 m.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 3

Adopt a road height and calculate the maximum allowable depth of water over the road.

Adopt the road height at the unrestricted 20-year ARI flood height and show the cross-sectional details in
Figure 4.34.

Figure 4.34: Floodway crossing cross-section

Source: DTMR (2010).

Closure to traffic occurs when (using Equation below):


𝑉2
𝐻=𝑑+ > 300 𝑚𝑚
2𝑔
where
𝑑 = Depth of inundation (m)
𝑉 = Flow velocity (m/s)
𝑔 = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

Austroads 2023 | page 153


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

The maximum allowable depth of water over the road, y, occurs when H = 0.300 m.

Therefore:
𝑉2 0.682
𝑑=𝐻− = 0.3 −
2𝑔 2 𝑥 9.81

𝑑 = 0.28 𝑚

Step 4

Calculate the discharge over the road and through the culverts in a 20-year ARI flood.

The total discharge over the road and through the culverts must equal the discharge in the unrestricted
channel downstream with flow at height 322.58 m.

i.e. Qtot = QR + QC = 130.4 m³/s

Flow over the road using Equation 37:

𝐶𝑠 37
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑓 𝐿𝐻1.5 ( )
𝐶𝑓
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

where

𝐶𝑓 = Coefficient of discharge

From Figure 4.11: Discharge coefficients for flow over floodway crossings Chart A:

H/l 0.30/10 = 0.03, which is < 0.15

Therefore:

Cf = 1.674

L = Length of floodway = 94 m

H = 0.30 m

Therefore:

Q = 1.674 x 94 x 0.31.5

Q = 25.9 m3/s

Discharge through culverts:

QC = Qtot – Q = 130.4 – 25.9 = 104.5 m³/s

Therefore, the culverts are required to take a discharge of 104.5 m³/s, operating under a head of 0.30 m and
under outlet control for this design condition.

Austroads 2023 | page 154


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 5

Detailed culvert design.

Proceed with the design of culverts to take 104.5 m³/s.

Height of culvert opening, D, from Equation 38:

D = Crown height of road – crossfall – minimum fill above culvert – thickness of 39


deck slab – invert height

D = 322.58 – 5 x 0.03 – 0.100 – 0.180 – 320.55 = 1.60 m

For culvert design:


• outlet control with H = 0.30 m,
• tailwater at height 322.58 m, HW at height 322.88 m, and
• invert at height 320.50 m, say.

From the culvert design procedure in Section 3.10 – Design Procedures:


• 13/2700 x 1500 mm RCBC have a capacity of 104 m³/s with outlet velocity = 1.98 m/s.
• Adopt 13/2700 x 1500 mm RCBC with a floodway crossing height 322.58 m and length 94 m.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 6

Check for culvert requirements when the flood is at the point of overtopping the road.

By trial and error, calculate flow through the culvert at the point where the headwater height is 322.58 m.
Confirm that flow velocity through the culvert is less than 2.5 m/s.

Step 7

Confirm that velocity criteria are met.

Step 8

Calculate afflux for ARI 50 year flow and confirm that criteria are met.

4.8.2 Example 2: Floodway Crossing Design

A new floodway crossing is to be designed for a country road. A sketch plan of the site is shown in
Figure 4.35. The road agency has decided that the road should be flood-free up to the five year ARI.
Hydrological estimates are Q5 = 7 m3/s and Q100 = 20 m3/s.

Using the method in Section 3.10 – Design Procedures, it has been accepted that four cells of 1500 mm x
600 mm box culverts will be used to carry the low flow. Under a total discharge of 20 m3/s the culverts would
carry 8.4 m3/s, and the remaining 11.6 m3/s is to flow across the floodway crossing.

Austroads 2023 | page 155


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Task

The downstream flood plain has an average slope of 1 in 333, and a cross-section as shown on Figure 4.3.

Analyse the stream using Manning’s Equation (see Section 2.3.3 – Fundamental Equations, Equation 3,
repeated here):
2⁄ 1⁄
𝑅 3𝑆 2
𝑉=
𝑛

Main channel

For a natural stream channel in the form of a minor stream with a fairly regular cross-section and some
weeds and light brush on the banks, Manning’s coefficient will be in the range

n = 0.035 – 0.05.

Select a value within the range, say n = 0.04.

Flood plain

For a natural stream channel in a flood plain through pasture, no brush, high grass; say
n = 0.035 – 0.05. Because the flow will be shallow relative to the grass height, select the highest roughness
value, n = 0.05.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

The slope S is:

1
𝑆= = 0.003
333
∴ √𝑠 = 0.0548

Analysis of stream cross-section

To analyse the stream cross-section, divide it into three segments related to the hydraulic roughness.

Try total depth = 0.85 m and apply Manning’s Equation to each segment of the longitudinal section of the
flood plain.

Austroads 2023 | page 156


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure 4.35: Details of example floodway crossing design


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: VicRoads (2003).

Austroads 2023 | page 157


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Segment 1

A= 60.25 x 0.25 = 15.06 m2


P = 60 + 0.25 x 2.236 = 60.56 m
𝑃 15.06
R = 𝐴 = 60.56 = 0.249 m
2⁄
𝑅 3 = 0.395

Segment 2

A = 11.2 x 0.6 + 12.4 x 0.25 = 9.82 m2


P = 10 + 2 x 0.6 x 2.236 = 12.683 m
𝑃 9.82
R = 𝐴 = 12.683 = 0.774 m
2⁄
𝑅 3 = 0.843

Segment 3

A = 21.85 x 0.25 = 5.46 m2


P = 21.6 + 0.25 x 2.236 = 22.16 m
𝑃 5.46
R = 𝐴 = 22.16 = 0.246 m
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

2⁄
𝑅 3 = 0.393

2⁄ 1⁄
𝐴𝑖 𝑅 3 𝑆 2
∑𝑄 = ∑
𝑛𝑖

15.06 𝑥 0.395 𝑥 0.0548 9.82 𝑥 0.843 𝑥 0.0548 5.46 𝑥 0.393 𝑥 0.0548


= + +
0.05 0.04 0.05

∑ Q = 20.2 m3 /s

Q100 = 20 m3/s which is less than channel capacity of 20.2 m 3/s. Therefore, accept 0.85 metres as
downstream depth.

D = d – y = 0.85 – (0.6 + 0.2) = 0.05 m.

Depth of flow

Generally, the flow will pass through a critical depth close to the highest point on the road. In this case, with
crossfall in the direction of flow, the critical depth will occur near the upstream edge. Water depths up to 300
mm are generally regarded as trafficable for cars (see Section 4.3 – Design Considerations). As a first trial,
set the critical depth at 0.2 m. If H is not known, and the approach velocity is small, an approximation can be
made of the total head on the weir by:

H = 1.5h.

Austroads 2023 | page 158


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Therefore,

H = 1.5 x 0.2 = 0.3 m.

Follow the procedure in Section Hydraulic Design.

Step 1

𝐻 0.3
= = 0.03
𝑊 10

As this value is less than 0.15, use the design graph A in Figure 4.3.

Step 2

For H = 0.3, read off Cf=1.677 from Figure 4.9 (part of Figure 4.3).

Figure 4.36: Head on roadway


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 3

The ratio of tailwater to upstream head is:

𝐻 0.05
= = 0.166 ≤ 0.7
𝐷 0.3

Therefore inundation does not occur, and

𝐶𝑠
= 1.0
𝐶𝑓

Austroads 2023 | page 159


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 4

Calculate minimum length of the level section of floodway crossing:

𝐶𝑠
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑓 𝐿 𝐻1.5
𝐶𝑓

𝑄
𝐿𝑚𝑖𝑛 =
𝐶𝑠 1.5
𝐶𝑓 𝐻
𝐶𝑓

11.6
𝐿𝑚𝑖𝑛 = = 42.0 𝑚
1.677 x 1.0 x 0.31.5

Round up to 50 m.

Check results

Repeat design steps using actual average velocity:

Flow area (A) and depth.

A = L x h = 50 x 0.2 = 10 m2
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

𝑄 11.6
𝑉= = = 1.16 𝑚/𝑠
𝐴 10

𝑉2
𝐻=𝑑+
2𝑔

1.162
𝐻 = 0.2 + = 0.268 𝑚
2 x 9.81

Original assumption was H = 0.3 m.

Check capacity, Q.

𝐶𝑠
𝑄 = 𝐶𝑓 𝐿 𝐻1.5
𝐶𝑓

𝑄 = 1.675 x 1 𝑥 50 x 0.2681.5

𝑄 = 11.62 𝑚3 ⁄𝑠

Acceptance criteria

Hydraulically, the floodway crossing capacity nearly equals the design discharge, and is acceptable.

Comparing the results with the trafficability criteria (see Section 4.2 – Design Considerations) – the flow
depth of 0.268 m is less than 0.3 m and the average velocity is about 1.2 m/s, with the V x D < 0.40, and is
therefore acceptable.

Austroads 2023 | page 160


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

References

Austroads (2010) Guide to road design part 3: geometric design (superseded), AGRD03-10, Austroads,
Sydney, NSW.
Austroads (2016) Guide to road design part 3: geometric design, AGRD03-16 (Edn 3.4 published February
2021), Austroads, Sydney, NSW.
Austroads (2017) Guide to road design part 6A: paths for walking and cycling, AGRD06A-17 (Edn 2.1
published February 2021), Austroads, Sydney, NSW.
Austroads (2021a) Guide to road design part 1: objectives of road design, AGRD01-21, Austroads, Sydney,
NSW.
Austroads (2022) Guide to road design part 6: roadside design, safety and barriers, AGRD06-20, Austroads,
Sydney, NSW.
Austroads (2023) Guide to road design part 5: drainage – general and hydrology considerations, AGRD05-
23, Austroads, Sydney, NSW.
Austroads (2023b) Guide to road design: part 5A: drainage – road surface, networks, basins and subsurface,
AGRD05A-21, Austroads, Sydney, NSW.
Catchments and Creeks (2011) Use of rock in engineering, webpage, Catchments and Creeks Pty Ltd, Ferny
Hills, Qld, accessed 17 December 2012.
Concrete Pipe Association of Australasia (2012) Hydraulics of precast concrete conduits, CPAA, St
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Leonards, NSW.
Department of Environment and Resource Management (2012) Soil conservation measures: design manual
for Queensland, DERM, Brisbane, Qld, accessed 21 March 2012.
Department of Natural Resources and Water (2007) Queensland urban drainage manual, vol. 1, 2nd edn,
DNRW, Brisbane, Qld.
Department of Transport and Main Roads (2010) Road drainage manual, DTMR, Brisbane, Qld.
Engineers Australia (2010) Australian rainfall and runoff: revision project 10: appropriate safety criteria for
people: stage 1 report, Engineers Australia, Barton, ACT.
Franzini J B and Finnemore E J (1997) Fluid mechanics with engineering applications, 9th edn, McGraw-Hill,
USA.
Ball J, Babister M, Nathan R, Weeks W, Weinmann E, Retallick M, Testoni I (Eds) (2019) Australian Rainfall
and Runoff: A Guide to Flood Estimation, Book 6 – Flood Hydraulics, Commonwealth of Australia
(Geoscience Australia), Canberra.
Herr L A and Bossy H G (1965) Hydraulic charts for the selection of highway culverts, hydraulic engineering
circular no. 5, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, USA.
Herr L A and Bossy H G (1972) Capacity charts for the hydraulic design of highway culverts, hydraulic
engineering circular no. 10, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, USA.
Kouwen N, Li R M and Simons D B (1981) ‘Flow resistance in vegetated waterways’, Transactions of the
American Society of Agricultural Engineers, vol. 24, no. 3, pp. 684-98.
Main Roads Western Australia (2006) Floodway design guide, MRWA, Perth, WA.
Patterson J C and Abercromby A K (1986) Floodway model tests, environmental dynamics report no. W-86-
027, University of Western Australia, Centre for Water Research, Nedlands, WA.
Peterka A J (1964) Hydraulic design of stilling basins and energy dissipaters, engineering monograph no.25,
Bureau of Reclamation, Department of Interior, Washington, DC, USA.
Roads and Traffic Authority (1993) Road design guide, RTA, Rosebery, NSW.

Austroads 2023 | page 161


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Thompson P L and Kilgore R T (2006) Hydraulic design of energy dissipators for culverts and channels, 3rd
edn, hydraulic engineering circular no. 14, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, USA.
Schall J D, Thompson P L, Zerges S M, Kilgore R T and Morris J L (2012) Hydraulic design of highway
culverts, 3rd edn, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, USA.
Underwood R (1995) Road engineering practice, Macmillan Education Australia, Melbourne, Vic.
VicRoads (1998) VicRoads standard drawings for roadworks: culverts, webpage, VicRoads, Kew, Vic,
accessed 23 May 2022.
VicRoads (2003) Road design guidelines: part 7: drainage, VicRoads, Kew, Vic.
Standards Australia
AS 1742.2-2009, Manual of uniform traffic control devices: part 2: traffic control devices for general use.
AS/NZS 2041.1-2011, Buried corrugated metal structures: design methods.
AS/NZS 3725-2007, Design for installation of buried concrete pipes.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 162


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Vegetal Retardance Curves

The vegetal charts are for determination of Manning’s n value. The charts provide guidance for heavy, thick
levels of grass to short lengths of grass (see Table 2.3: for the degree of retardance). The use of these
charts requires the flow depth to be greater than the height of the vegetation as appropriate for each
respective chart.

Figure A 1: Solution of Manning’s Equation for vegetal retardance A


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 163


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure A 2: Solution of Manning’s Equation for vegetal retardance B


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 164


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure A 3: Solution of Manning’s Equation for vegetal retardance C


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 165


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure A 4: Solution of Manning’s Equation for vegetal retardance D


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 166


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure A 5: Solution of Manning’s Equation for vegetal retardance E


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 167


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Inlet and Outlet Control Nomographs

General

The headwater discharge charts shown in Figure B 1 and Figure B 2 are for the design of concrete culverts
with inlet control. Corresponding charts for corrugated steel and metal culverts are shown in Figure B 3 and
Figure B 4. Design charts for other types of culverts are given in the hydraulic charts for the selection of
highway culverts (Herr and Bossy 1965) and are usually available from the manufacturers of the culverts.

Figure B 5 and Figure B 6 show the outlet head for concrete box culverts and pipes whilst Figure B 7, Figure
B 8Figure B 12, Figure B 9, and Figure B 10 are outlet control nomographs for various corrugated metal
structures running full, including circular and pipe arches, and small and large corrugation size.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 168


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Inlet Control
Figure B 1: Headwater depth for box culvert with inlet control
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 169


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 6: Headwater depth for concrete pipe culverts with inlet control
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 170


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 7: Inlet control nomograph – CMP and SPCSP culvert


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 171


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 8: Inlet control nomograph – CMPA and SPCSPA culvert


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 172


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Outlet Control
Figure B 9: Head for concrete box culverts flowing full with outlet control (n=0.012)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 173


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 10: Head for concrete pipes flowing full with outlet control (n=0.012)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 174


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 11: Outlet control nomograph – corrugated metal pipe (CMP) flowing full (n=0.024)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 175


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 12: Outlet control nomograph – structural plate corrugated steel pipe (SPCSP) flowing full (n=0.0328 to
0.0302)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 176


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 13: Outlet control nomograph – corrugated steel pipe arch (CSPA) flowing full (n=0.024)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 177


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure B 14: Outlet control nomograph – structural plate corrugated steel pipe arch (SPCSPA) flowing full
(n=0.0327 to 0.0306)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 178


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Velocity and Critical Depth

General

The outlet velocity for culverts operating under inlet control may be assumed to equal the normal velocity in
open channel in the barrel as computed by Manning’s Equation for the discharge, barrel geometry,
roughness and slope of the barrel.

The velocity may be readily obtained by the use of Figure C 1 and Figure C 2 for round pipes flowing full and
part-full respectively, and Manning’s Equation for rectangular culverts. Critical depth may be obtained from
Figure C 3, Figure C 4, Figure C 5 and Figure C 6.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Austroads 2023 | page 179


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 1: Discharge and velocity in round pipes flowing full


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 180


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 2: Velocity and discharge in part-full pipes

Af = Area of pipe
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

df
dp
Ap

Source: Adapted from DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 181


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 3: Critical depth in a rectangular section


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 182


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 4: Critical depth in a circular pipe


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 183


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 5: Critical depth in a corrugated steel pipe arch (CPSA) (hc)


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

A = Cross-sectional area per cell

Other sizes to be interpolated

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 184


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Figure C 6: Critical depth in a structural plate corrugated steel pipe arch (SPCSPA) (hc)
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

A = Cross-sectional area per cell

Other sizes to be interpolated

Source: DTMR (2010).

Austroads 2023 | page 185


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Culvert Capacity

Introduction

The following charts Figure D 1 to Figure D 4 are based on a Manning’s n = 0.012.

Socket End of Spigot and Socket Pipes

Figure D 1: Concrete pipes 450 mm – 1650 mm diameter where TW < dc


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Reading ACCURACY LIMITATIONS


(1) For L/30So ≤Inlet control value, determine HW from Inlet control The following limitations apply for accurate determination of
line. HW
(2) For L/30So between Inlet and Outlet control values, interpolate (1) TW < dc
(2) For L/30So ≤ Outlet control value, HW < 2D.
to determine HW.
(3) For Outlet control value < L/30So < 1.5 x Outlet
(3) For L/30So in the range 1.0 to 1.5 x Outlet control value,
control value, HW < 1.3D.
extrapolate and determine HW.

Source: Herr and Bossy (1972).

Austroads 2023 | page 186


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Socket End of Spigot and Socket Pipes

Figure D 2: Concrete pipes 1500 mm – 4500 mm diameter where TW < dc


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

READING ACCURACY LIMITATIONS


(1) For L/30So ≤ Inlet control value, determine HW from Inlet The following limitations apply for accurate determination of HW:
control line. (1) TW < dC
(2) For L/30So between Inlet and Outlet control values, (2) For L/30So ≤ Outlet control value, HW < 2D.
interpolate to determine HW. (3) For Outlet control value < L/30So < 1.5 x Outlet control value,
(3) For L/30So in the range 1.0 to 1.5 x Outlet control value, HW < 1.3D.
extrapolate and determine HW.

Source: Herr and Bossy (1972).

Austroads 2023 | page 187


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Flush Jointed Pipes

Figure D 3: Concrete pipes 900 mm – 4500 mm diameter where TW < dC


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

READING ACCUARCY LIMITATIONS


(1) For L/30So ≤ Inlet control value, determine HW The following limitations apply for accurate determination of HW
from Inlet control line. (1) TW < dc
(2) For L/30S0 between Inlet and Outlet control value, (2) For L/30So ≤ Outlet control value, HW < 2D
extrapolate and determine HW. (3) For Outlet control value < L/30So < 1.5 x Outlet control value, HW <
(3) For L/30so in the range 1.0 to 1.5 x Outlet control 1.3D
value, extrapolate and determine HW.

Source: Herr and Bossy (1972).

Austroads 2023 | page 188


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Concrete Box Culverts Culvert capacity

Figure D 4: Concrete box culverts


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

READING ACCURACY LIMITATIONS


(1) For L/30So ≤ Inlet control value, determine HW from Inlet The following limitations apply for accurate determination of HW
control line. (1) TW < dc
(2) For L/30So between Inlet and Outlet control values, (2) For L/30So ≤ Outlet control value, HW < 2D.
interpolate to determine HW. (3) For Outlet control value < L/30So < 1.5 x Outlet control
(3) For L/30So in the range 1.0 to 1.5 x Outlet control value, value HW < 1.3D
extrapolate and determine HW.

Source: Herr and Bossy (1972).

Austroads 2023 | page 189


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Solving Manning’s Equation

The following provides examples of the application of Manning’s Equation for determining the hydraulic
characteristics of an existing stream in order to generate data that would be used for the proposed culvert
design. The first application is to determine the existing stream, or channel hydraulics. The second
application is to determine the culvert outlet velocity when outlet control conditions govern the design and the
third application is to determine the culvert outlet velocity when inlet control conditions govern the design.

Introduction

Manning’s Equation:

V = R2/3S1/2/n

and Equation 1:

Q=VxA

are based on ‘steady state’ and ‘uniform flow’ assumptions but can be used to determine prototype hydraulic
characteristics for many flow states.

Manning’s Equation is commonly used to determine the flow characteristics for:


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

• existing channels. The hydraulic data generated is used as boundary conditions for proposed new
hydraulic structures such as culverts. This data should be verified from site observations or anecdotal
evidence from adjacent property owners
• within barrel flow conditions for proposed or existing culverts flowing part full or ‘just full’
• culvert outlets. In particular it is necessary to determine the culvert outlet velocity and the flow is
commonly only part full.

For simple conduits Manning’s Equation can be solved from a first principle approach. More complex
conduits can be solved using a ‘trial and error’ method but this can be time consuming. This Appendix
presents a method for solving Manning’s Equation using tables of data for pipes (Table E 1) and trapezoidal
conduits (Table E 2) which includes rectangular conduits when z = 0.0. While careful use of the data would
yield an exact solution in practice it is expected a solution within 1% of the exact solution will be satisfactory.
Designers are encouraged to self-check their calculations or have them independently checked in order to
minimise the chance of errors.

Table E 1 and Table E 2 are for use with metric units as indicated by the following applications.

Application 1

Existing channel hydraulics (see Section 3.7.2 – Outlet Velocity).

In order to determine the flow boundary conditions for a new culvert the existing channel hydraulics need to
be determined. The flow depth (which equals the TW depth for the culvert) and the flow velocity (which
should be correlated to the allowable channel velocity) are the hydraulic characteristics that need to be
determined. Site survey is required to determine the typical channel cross-section and longitudinal bed slope.
It is common for the actual channel cross-section to be represented by a symmetrical trapezoidal channel
with side slopes within the range presented in the attached Table E 2.

It is expected the following parameters will be known:

Design discharge : Q (m3/s)

Austroads 2023 | page 190


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Channel base width : B (m)

Channel side slope : Z (where the side slope is defined by 1 (V):Z (H)

Channel depth : before berm flow occurs – D (m)

Channel roughness :n

Channel longitudinal slope : S (m/m)

See Figure E 1 which shows the channel parameters.

Step 1

Determine Qn/(S1/2 B8/3).

Step 2

Use linear interpolation of Table E 2 to solve for y/B using the appropriate Z column data.

Step 3

With y/B solve for y, the estimated flow depth. If the flow depth y, is greater than the channel depth D, then
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

berm flow occurs and conveyance in the various section widths (left bank berm, main channel and right bank
berm) needs to be determined – this case is beyond the scope of this procedure. The following steps
assume y < D.

Step 4

With the flow depth determined the flow area can be determined.

Step 5

The channel flow velocity can be determined using V = Q/A.

Step 6 (Check)

Use the determined y, flow area A and the channel data to determine the following:
• Flow wetted perimeter (P).
• Hydraulic radius (= A/P).
• Flow velocity using Manning’s Equation V = R2/3S1/2/n.
• Verify the determined flow velocity in Step 6 is within 1% of that determined in Step 5.
• Flow capacity Q = V x A (channel capacity for flow depth y).
• Verify the determined flow capacity is within 1% of the design discharge.

Austroads 2023 | page 191


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Example 1:

Design discharge Q = 2 m3/s

Channel base width B = 0.8 m

Channel side slope Z = 1.0

Channel depth D = 1.5 m

Channel roughness n = 0.04

Channel longitudinal slope S = 0.005

Step 1 Qn/(S1/2 B8/3) = 2.0514

Step 2 y/B = (2.0514 – 2.05)/(3.000 – 2.05) x (1.50 – 1.25) + 1.25 = 1.2504


This is less than the channel depth and all the flow is contained in the channel.

Step 3 y = 1.2504 x B = 1.0003 m, say 1.00 m

Step 4 A = 1.80 m2((1.0 + 0.8) x 1.0)


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 5 V = Q/A = 2.0/1.80 = 1.111 m/s

Step 6 P = 3.6284 m (√2 x 1.0 x 2 + 0.8)


(Check)
R = 0.4961 m (A/P)
V = 1.1078 m/s (= R2/3S1/2/n)

Excellent agreement with the flow velocity – hence OK

Q (Capacity at y = 1.00 m) = 994 m3/s.

Excellent agreement with the design discharge – hence OK.

Application 2

Outlet velocity – outlet control (see Section 3.10.8 – Outlet Velocity – Outlet control).

As outlined in Section 3.10.8 three water depth conditions need to be considered to determine the controlling
boundary water depth for use in determining the outlet flow velocity. The design discharge is known. Once
the controlling water depth is determined barrel geometric data is required to determine the flow area. Once
the flow area is determined Equation 1 can be used to determine the flow velocity.

The application method is hence dependent on the shape of the barrel and two methods are presented
below, one for pipe (circular) barrels using Table E 1 and the other for box (rectangular or square) barrels
using Table E 2.

Austroads 2023 | page 192


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Method A: For pipe barrels

Step 1 Determine the flow regime that occurs under the design discharge and hence assess the y to
be used for calculating the outlet flow velocity

Step 2 Calculate y/D

Step 3 Use linear interpolation of Table E 1 on y/D to solve for A/D2

Step 4 With A/D2 solve for A, the estimated flow area

Step 5 Determine the flow velocity using V = Q/A

(Note: There is no check procedure available because the flow depth is fixed by the outlet flow depth
determined for the culvert hydraulics.)

Example 2:

Design discharge 2.0 m3/s

Pipe diameter 0.9 m

Step 1 Say y = 0.83 m governed by outlet flow conditions


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Step 2 y/D = 0.9222

Step 3 A/D2 = (0.9222 – 0.90)/(0.9500 – 0.90) x (0.7707 – 0.7445) + 0.7445


(determined by interpolating from Table E 1)
= (0.0222)/(0.05) x (0.0262) + 0.7445
= 0.7561

Step 4 A = 0.7561 (0.9)2 = 0.6125 m2

Step 5 V = Q/A = 2.0/0.6125 = 3.266 m/s say 3.27 m/s

Method B: For box culverts

Step 1 Determine the flow regime that occurs under the design discharge and hence assess the y to
be used for calculating the outlet flow velocity

Step 2 Calculate the flow area = y x B

Step 3 Determine the flow velocity using V = Q/A

Example 3:

Design discharge 2.0 m3/s

Box culvert size 1.0 m x 1.0 m (B x D)

Step 1 Say y = 0.83 m governed by outlet flow conditions

Step 2 A = y x B = 0.83 x 1.0 = 0.83 m2

Step 3 V = Q/A = 2.0/0.83 = 2.4096 m/s say 2.41 m/s

Austroads 2023 | page 193


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Application 3

Outlet velocity – inlet control (see Section 3.10.9).

As outlined in Section 3.10.9 when it is determined that inlet control conditions govern culvert hydraulics the
outlet flow velocity is determined assuming uniform flow conditions develop within the culvert barrel and the
flow velocity occurring within the uniform flow section is assumed to represent the outlet flow velocity. The
design discharge is known. Once the uniform flow depth is determined barrel geometric data is used to
determine the flow area. Once the flow area is determined Equation 1 can be used to determine the flow
velocity.

The application method is hence dependent on the shape of the barrel and two methods are presented
below, one for pipe (circular) barrels and the other for box (rectangular or square) barrels. It is noted that for
pipes there is no need to determine the uniform flow depth as the flow area can be determined directly from
the data in Table E 1 and Table E 2.

Method A: For pipe barrels

Step 1 For the design discharge Q pipe sizing calculations will have been undertaken to determine
pipe diameter D which satisfies both inlet and outlet control conditions for the adopted
configuration (inlet type, barrel shape, length, roughness and inlet/outlet flow conditions)

Step 2 Calculate Qn/(S1/2 D8/3)

Step 3 Check If Qn/(S1/2D8/3) < 0.335


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

This check needs to be met for open channel flow (OCF) within the barrel. Should this check
not be met then either the pipe roughness or the design discharge Q is too large to pass the
flow through the pipe as OCF. The pipe slope or diameter needs to be increased to pass the
flow but this will generate higher outlet energy. If this arises the designer should review the
overall culvert design with a focus on controlling the outlet energy. The following steps assume
OCF occurs within the barrel.

Step 4 Use linear interpolation of Table E 1 to solve for A/D2 assuming the flow conditions are below
peak – which occurs at approximately y/D = 0.95

Step 5 With A/D2 solve for A, the estimated flow area

Step 6 Determine the flow velocity using V = Q/A

Step 7 From Step 2 use linear interpolation to solve for R/D


(Check)

Step 8 With R/D solve for R, the estimated hydraulic radius

Step 9 Determine the flow velocity using Manning’s Equation V = R2/3S1/2/n

Verify that the flow velocity (Step 5) and the flow velocity (Step 8) are within a 1% difference.

Example 4:

Design discharge 2.0 m3/s

Pipe diameter 0.9 m

Pipe roughness 0.012

Pipe slope 0.010 m/m

Austroads 2023 | page 194


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 1 It is determined that inlet control conditions govern (low TW and/or steep culvert slope)

Step 2 Qn/(S1/2 D8/3 ) = 0.3179

Step 3 Is Qn/(S1/2 D8/3) < 0.335 – Yes, hence OCF occurs

Step 4 A/D2 = (0.3179 – 0.305)/(0.3210 – 0.305) x (0.7115 – 0.6736) + 0.6736


(determined by interpolating from Table E 1)
= (0.0129)/(0.016) x (0.0379) + 0.6736
= 0.7042

Step 5 A = 0.7042 x (0.9)2 = 0.5704 m2

Step 6 V = Q/A = 2.0/0.5704

Step 7 R/D = (0.3179 – 0.305)/(0.3210 – 0.305) x (0.3033 – 0.3042) + 0.3042


(Check)
= (0.0129)/(0.016) x (– 0.0009) + 0.3042
= 0.3035

Step 8 R = 0.3035 (0.9) = 0.2731 m

Step 9 V= R2/3S1/2/n = 3.508 m/s


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Excellent agreement with the flow velocity determined in Step 5 – OK.

(Note: If desired the flow depth can be determined. In this example it is observed the flow depth y/D
approximates 0.84.)

Method B: For box culverts

Step 1 For the design discharge Q pipe sizing calculations will have been undertaken to determine the
box culvert sizing B x D (width x height) which satisfies both inlet and outlet control conditions
for the adopted configuration (inlet type, barrel shape, length, roughness and inlet/outlet flow
conditions)

Step 2 Calculate Qn/(S1/2B8/3)

Step 3 Determine D/B and associated Qn/(S1/2B8/3) when the barrel is full.
(Check)
Determine if Qn/(S1/2B8/3) < Qn/(S1/2B8/3) when the barrel is full.
This check needs to be met for open channel flow (OCF) to occur within the barrel. Should this
check not be met then either the box culvert roughness or the design discharge Q is too large
to pass the flow through the barrel as OCF. The barrel slope or sizing needs to be increased to
pass the flow but this will generate higher outlet energy. If this arises the designer should
review the overall culvert design with a focus on controlling the outlet energy. The following
steps assume OCF occurs within the barrel.

Step 4 Use linear interpolation of Table E 2 to solve for y/B

Step 5 With y/B solve for y, the estimated flow depth and the flow area = y x B

Step 6 Determine the flow velocity using V = Q/A

Step 7 From Step 4, y is known and A is known


(Check)
Determine P=2y+B

Austroads 2023 | page 195


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Step 8 Determine R = A/P, the estimated hydraulic radius

Step 9 Determine the flow velocity using Manning’s Equation V = R2/3S1/2/n

Verify that the flow velocity (Step 6) and that flow velocity (Step 9) are within a 1% difference.

Example 5:

Design discharge 2.0 m3/s

Box culvert size 1.0 m x 1.0 m (B x D)

Geometry Trapezoid with Z = 0.0

Barrel roughness 0.012

Barrel slope 0.010 m/m

Step 1 It is determined that inlet control conditions govern (low TW and/or steep culvert slope)

Step 2 Qn/(S1/2 B8/3) = 0.240

Step 3 Check – For D/B = 1.0 and Z = 0.0 Qn/(S1/2B8/3) when the barrel is full = 0.481.
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

(Check)
Is Qn/(S1/2B8/3) < 0.481 – Yes hence OCF occurs.

Step 4 y/B = (0.240 – 0.199)/(0.252 – 0.199) x (0.60 – 0.50) + 0.50 = (0.041)/(0.053) x (0.10) + 0.50
= 0.5774

Step 5 y = 0.5774 (1.0) = 0.5774 m and


A = y x B = 0.5774 m2

Step 6 V = Q/A = 2.0/0.5774


= 3.464 m/s say 3.46 m/s

Step 7 y = 0.5774 m
(Check)
A = 0.5774 m2
P = 2 x 0.5774 m + 1.0 m = 2.1548 m

Step 8 R = A/P = 0.2680 m

Step 9 V = R2/3S1/2/n = 3.464 m/s

Excellent agreement with the flow velocity determined in Step 5 – OK.

Austroads 2023 | page 196


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table E 1: Uniform flow in circular sections flowing partly full

y = depth of flow
Q = discharge in m3/s
D = diameter of pipe
n = Manning’s coefficient (0.012 for concrete pipe)
A = area of flow
S = slope of channel bottom and of water surface
R = hydraulic radius

A/D2 R/D Qn/D8/3 Qn/y8/3


y/D
S1/2 S1/2
0.01 .0013 .0066 .00005 10.31
.05 .0147 .0325 .00150 4.41
.10 .0409 .0635 .00651 3.02
.15 .0739 .0929 .01515 2.38
.20 .1118 .1206 .0273 1.99
.25 .1535 .1466 .0427 1.72
.30 .1982 .1709 .0611 1.51
.35 .2450 .1935 .0820 1.35
.40 .2934 .2142 .1051 1.210
.45 .3428 .2331 .1299 1.092
.50 .3927 .2500 .1560 .990
.55 .4426 .2649 .1820 .900
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

.60 .4920 .2776 .2090 .818


.65 .5404 .2882 .2360 .744
.70 .5872 .2962 .2610 .676
.75 .6319 .3017 .2840 .613
.80 .6736 .3042 .3050 .553
.85 .7115 .3033 .3210 .496
.90 .7445 .2980 .3330 .440
.95 .7707 .2865 .3350 .384
1.00 .7854 .2500 .3120 .312

Source: Adapted from Thompson and Kilgore (2006).

Austroads 2023 | page 197


Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Table E 2: Flow in trapezoidal channels by Manning’s Equation

𝑄𝑛
Values of
𝐵 8⁄3 𝑆 1⁄2

Z=0 Z = 1/4 Z = 1/2 Z = 3/4 Z=1 Z=1 Z = 11/2 Z = 13/4 Z=2 Z=3
y/B
1/4
.05 .00638 .00649 .00660 .00667 .00673 .00680 .00687 .00693 .00693 .00714
.10 .0191 .0198 .0206 .0210 .0125 .0129 .0222 .0225 .0229 .0241
.15 .0356 .0377 .0394 .0409 .0423 .0435 .0446 .0459 .0466 .0505
.20 .0548 .0590 .0628 .0660 .0687 .0714 .0741 .0761 .0781 .0869
.25 .0761 .0835 .0896 .0956 .101 .106 .110 .114 .118 .134
.30 .0983 .110 .121 .130 .138 .147 .153 .161 .167 .193
.35 .122 .140 .155 .169 .182 .193 .204 .214 .225 .264
.40 .147 .171 .193 .211 .230 .246 .262 .277 .292 .349
.45 .172 .204 .233 .259 .284 .306 .328 .349 .369 .448
.50 .199 .240 .277 .312 .345 .374 .403 .430 .457 .561
.60 .252 .315 .374 .431 .483 .531 .578 .822 .665 .835
.70 .308 .398 .486 .567 .645 .720 .788 .855 .922 1.18
.80 .365 .488 .610 .727 .835 .943 1.04 1.14 1.23 1.60
.90 .422 .586 .747 .902 1.05 1.19 1.33 1.46 1.59 2.09
© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

1.00 .481 .687 .895 1.10 1.30 1.49 1.66 1.84 2.01 2.67
1.25 .630 .976 1.34 1.70 2.05 2.38 2.71 3.02 3.33 4.53
1.50 .781 1.31 1.87 2.44 3.00 3.54 4.07 4.59 5.08 7.00
1.75 .936 1.68 2.51 3.35 4.18 4.99 5.77 6.54 7.34 10.2
2.00 1.08 2.10 3.25 4.43 5.60 6.73 7.88 8.95 10.0 14.2
2.50 1.39 3.08 6.06 7.14 9.22 11.30 13.30 15.3 17.2 24.9
3.00 1.70 4.26 7.41 10.71 14.10 17.40 20.60 23.8 27.0 39.3
4.00 2.33 7.27 13.60 20.54 27.70 34.70 41.70 48.5 55.3 82.1

Source: Adapted from Thompson and Kilgore (2006).

Figure E 1: Open channel terms

Austroads 2023 | page 198


© Austroads Ltd 2023 | This material is not to be used for commercial training purposes, unless approved by Austroads.

Guide to Road Design Part 5B: Drainage – Open Channels, Culverts and Floodway Crossings

Austroads 2023 | page 199

You might also like